Im720120 61e

SL1000
Acquisition Software
IM 720120-61E
7th Edition
Thank you for purchasing the SL1000 High-Speed Data Acquisition Unit. This user’s
manual explains the functions and operating procedures of the SL1000 Acquisition
Software. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before beginning
operation.
After reading the manual, keep it in a convenient location for quick reference whenever a
question arises during operation.
List of Manuals
The following manuals, including this one, are provided as manuals for the SL1000.
Please read all of them.
Manual Title Manual No. Description
SL1000 IM 720120-01E Explains all functions and procedures of
High-Speed Data Acquisition Unit the SL1000 excluding the communication
User’s Manual functions.
SL1000 Acquisition Software IM 720120-61E This manual. Explains all functions and
User’s Manual procedures of the Acquisition Software used
to configure and control the SL1000.
SL1000 Input Module IM 720120-51E Explains the specifications of the input
User’s Manual modules that can be installed in the SL1000.
Precautions Concerning the IM 701250-04E The manual explains the precautions
Modules concerning the modules.
701992 Xviewer Install Manual IM 701992-02E This manual explains how to install the
Xviewer* setup software.
SL1000 IM 720120-92 Document for China
High-Speed Data Acquisition Unit
The “E” in the manual numbers are the language codes.

* The Xviewer user’s manual is included in the Xviewer help.
Contact information of Yokogawa offices worldwide is provided on the following sheet.

Document No. Description
PIM 113-01Z2 List of worldwide contacts
Notes
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of
continuing improvements to the instrument’s performance and functions. The figures
given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy
of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please
contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without
YOKOGAWA’s permission is strictly prohibited.
• The TCP/IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP/IP
software have been developed/created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking
Software, Release 1 that has been licensed from University of California.
7th Edition: October 2015 (YMI)

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2007 Yokogawa Electric Corporation
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2012 Yokogawa Meters & Instruments Corporation
IM 720120-61E i
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and
Windows 8 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
• Adobe, Acrobat, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• MATLAB is a registered trademark of The MathWorks, Incorporated in the United
States.
• For purposes of this manual, the ® and TM symbols do not accompany their
respective registered trademark names or trademark names.
• Other company and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective holders.
Revisions
• 1st Edition: September 2007
• 2nd Edition: September 2008
• 3rd Edition: May 2009
• 4th Edition: July 2012
• 5th Edition: September 2013
• 6th Edition: June 2014
• 7th Edition: October 2015
ii IM 720120-61E
Terms and Conditions of the Software License
Yokogawa Electric Corporation, a Japanese corporation (hereinafter called “Yokogawa”), grants permission to use this Yokogawa Software Program (hereinafter called the
“Licensed Software”) to the Licensee on the conditions that the Licensee agrees to the terms and conditions stipulated in Article 1 hereof.
You, as the Licensee (hereinafter called “Licensee”), shall agree to the following terms and conditions for the software license (hereinafter called the “Agreement”) based
on the use intended for the Licensed Software.
Please note that Yokogawa grants the Licensee permission to use the Licensed Software under the terms and conditions herein and in no event shall Yokogawa intend to
sell or transfer the Licensed Software to the Licensee.
Licensed Software Name: SL1000 Acquisition Software
Number of License: 1
Article 1 (Scope Covered by these Terms and Conditions)

1.1 The terms and conditions stipulated herein shall be applied to any Licensee who purchases the Licensed Software on the condition that the Licensee consents to agree
to the terms and conditions stipulated herein.
1.2 The “Licensed Software” herein shall mean and include all applicable programs and documentation, without limitation, all proprietary technology, algorithms, and know-
how such as a factor, invariant or process contained therein.
Article 2 (Grant of License)

2.1 Yokogawa grants the Licensee, for the purpose of single use, non-exclusive and non-transferable license of the Licensed Software with the license fee separately
agreed upon by both parties.
2.2 The Licensee is, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Yokogawa, not entitled to copy, change, sell, distribute, transfer, or sublicense the Licensed Software.
2.3 The Licensed Software shall not be copied in whole or in part except for keeping one (1) copy for back-up purposes. The Licensee shall secure or supervise the copy
of the Licensed Software by the Licensee itself with great, strict, and due care.
2.4 In no event shall the Licensee dump, reverse assemble, reverse compile, or reverse engineer the Licensed Software so that the Licensee may translate the Licensed
Software into other programs or change it into a man-readable form from the source code of the Licensed Software. Unless otherwise separately agreed by Yokogawa,
Yokogawa shall not provide the Licensee the source code for the Licensed Software.
2.5 The Licensed Software and its related documentation shall be the proprietary property or trade secret of Yokogawa or a third party which grants Yokogawa the rights. In
no event shall the Licensee be transferred, leased, sublicensed, or assigned any rights relating to the Licensed Software.
2.6 Yokogawa may use or add copy protection in or onto the Licensed Software. In no event shall the Licensee remove or attempt to remove such copy protection.
2.7 The Licensed Software may include a software program licensed for re-use by a third party (hereinafter called “Third Party Software”, which may include any software
program from affiliates of Yokogawa made or coded by themselves.) In the case that Yokogawa is granted permission to sublicense to third parties by any licensors
(sub-licensor) of the Third Party Software pursuant to different terms and conditions than those stipulated in this Agreement, the Licensee shall observe such terms and
conditions of which Yokogawa notifies the Licensee in writing separately.
2.8 In no event shall the Licensee modify, remove or delete a copyright notice of Yokogawa and its licenser contained in the Licensed Software, including any copy thereof.
Article 3 (Restriction of Specific Use)

3.1 The Licensed Software shall not be intended specifically to be designed, developed, constructed, manufactured, distributed or maintained for the purpose of the
following events:
a) Operation of any aviation, vessel, or support of those operations from the ground;,
b) Operation of nuclear products and/or facilities;,
c) Operation of nuclear weapons and/or chemical weapons and/or biological weapons; or
d) Operation of medical instrumentation directly utilized for humankind or the human body.
3.2 Even if the Licensee uses the Licensed Software for the purposes in the preceding Paragraph 3.1, Yokogawa has no liability to or responsibility for any demand or
damage arising out of the use or operations of the Licensed Software, and the Licensee agrees, on its own responsibility, to solve and settle the claims and damages
and to defend, indemnify or hold Yokogawa totally harmless, from or against any liabilities, losses, damages and expenses (including fees for recalling the Products and
reasonable attorney’s fees and court costs), or claims arising out of and related to the above-said claims and damages.
Article 4 (Warranty)
4.1 The Licensee shall agree that the Licensed Software shall be provided to the Licensee on an “as is” basis when delivered. If defect(s), such as damage to the medium
of the Licensed Software, attributable to Yokogawa is found, Yokogawa agrees to replace, free of charge, any Licensed Software on condition that the defective
Licensed Software shall be returned to Yokogawa’s specified authorized service facility within seven (7) days after opening the Package at the Licensee’s expense. As
the Licensed Software is provided to the Licensee on an “as is” basis when delivered, in no event shall Yokogawa warrant that any information on or in the Licensed
Software, including without limitation, data on computer programs and program listings, be completely accurate, correct, reliable, or the most updated.
4.2 Notwithstanding the preceding Paragraph 4.1, when third party software is included in the Licensed Software, the warranty period and terms and conditions that apply
shall be those established by the provider of the third party software.
4.3 When Yokogawa decides in its own judgement that it is necessary, Yokogawa may from time to time provide the Licensee with Revision upgrades and Version upgrades
separately specified by Yokogawa (hereinafter called “Updates”).
4.4 Notwithstanding the preceding Paragraph 4.3, in no event shall Yokogawa provide Updates where the Licensee or any third party conducted renovation or improvement
of the Licensed Software.
4.5 THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE, WRITTEN, ORAL, OR
IMPLIED, AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY YOKOGAWA AND ALL THIRD PARTIES LICENSING THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE TO YOKOGAWA.
4.6 Correction of nonconformity in the manner and for the period of time provided above shall be the Licensee’s sole and exclusive remedy for any failure of Yokogawa to
comply with its obligations and shall constitute fulfillment of all liabilities of Yokogawa and any third party licensing the Third Party Software to Yokogawa (including any
liability for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages) whether in warranty, contract, tort (including negligence but excluding willful conduct or gross
negligence by Yokogawa) or otherwise with respect to or arising out of the use of the Licensed Software.
Article 5 (Infringement)
5.1 If and when any third party should demand injunction, initiate a law suit, or demand compensation for damages against the Licensee under patent right (including utility
model right, design patent, and trade mark), copy right, and any other rights relating to any of the Licensed Software, the Licensee shall notify Yokogawa in writing to
that effect without delay.
5.2 In the case of the preceding Paragraph 5.1, the Licensee shall assign to Yokogawa all of the rights to defend the Licensee and to negotiate with the claiming party.
Furthermore, the Licensee shall provide Yokogawa with necessary information or any other assistance for Yokogawa’s defense and negotiation. If and when such a
claim should be attributable to Yokogawa, subject to the written notice to Yokogawa stated in the preceding Paragraph 5.1, Yokogawa shall defend the Licensee and
negotiate with the claiming party at Yokogawa’s cost and expense and be responsible for the final settlement or judgment granted to the claiming party in the preceding
Paragraph 5.1.
5.3 When any assertion or allegation of the infringement of the third party’s rights defined in Paragraph 5.1 is made, or when at Yokogawa’s judgment there is possibility of
such assertion or allegation, Yokogawa will, at its own discretion, take any of the following countermeasures at Yokogawa’s cost and expense.
a) To acquire the necessary right from a third party which has lawful ownership of the right so that the Licensee will be able to continue to use the Licensed Software;
b) To replace the Licensed Software with an alternative one which avoids the infringement; or
c) To remodel the Licensed Software so that the Licensed Software can avoid the infringement of such third party’s right.
5.4 If and when Yokogawa fails to take either of the countermeasures as set forth in the preceding subparagraphs of Paragraph 5.3, Yokogawa shall indemnify the Licensee
only by paying back the price amount of the Licensed Software which Yokogawa has received from the Licensee. THE FOREGOING PARAGRAPHS STATE THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF YOKOGAWA AND ANY THIRD PARTY LICENSING THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE TO YOKOGAWA WITH RESPECT TO INFRINGEMENT OF
THE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PATENT AND COPYRIGHT.
IM 720120-61E iii
Terms and Conditions of the Software License
Article 6 (Liabilities)
6.1 If and when the Licensee should incur any damage relating to or arising out of the Licensed Software or service that Yokogawa has provided to the Licensee under the
conditions herein due to a reason attributable to Yokogawa, Yokogawa shall take actions in accordance with this Agreement. However, in no event shall Yokogawa
be liable or responsible for any special, incidental, consequential and/or indirect damage, whether in contract, warranty, tort, negligence, strict liability, or otherwise,
including, without limitation, loss of operational profit or revenue, loss of use of the Licensed Software, or any associated products or equipment, cost of capital, loss
or cost of interruption of the Licensee’s business, substitute equipment, facilities or services, downtime costs, delays, and loss of business information, or claims of
customers of Licensee or other third parties for such or other damages. Even if Yokogawa is liable or responsible for the damages attributable to Yokogawa and to the
extent of this Article 6, Yokogawa’s liability for the Licensee’s damage shall not exceed the price amount of the Licensed Software or service fee which Yokogawa has
received. Please note that Yokogawa shall be released or discharged from part or all of the liability under this Agreement if the Licensee modifies, remodels, combines
with other software or products, or causes any deviation from the basic specifications or functional specifications, without Yokogawa’s prior written consent.
6.2 All causes of action against Yokogawa arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the performance or breach hereof shall expire unless Yokogawa is notified of the
claim within one (1) year of its occurrence.
6.3 In no event, regardless of cause, shall Yokogawa assume responsibility for or be liable for penalties or penalty clauses in any contracts between the Licensee and its
customers.
Article 7 (Limit of Export)

Unless otherwise agreed by Yokogawa, the Licensee shall not directly or indirectly export or transfer the Licensed Software to any countries other than those where
Yokogawa permits export in advance.
Article 8 (Term)
This Agreement shall become effective on the date when the Licensee receives the Licensed Software and continues in effect unless or until terminated as provided herein,
or the Licensee ceases using the Licensed Software by itself or with Yokogawa’s thirty (30) days prior written notice to the Licensee.
Article 9 (Injunction for Use)

During the term of this Agreement, Yokogawa may, at its own discretion, demand injunction against the Licensee in case that Yokogawa deems that the Licensed Software
is used improperly or under severer environments other than those where Yokogawa has first approved, or any other condition which Yokogawa may not permit.
Article 10 (Termination)
Yokogawa, at its sole discretion, may terminate this Agreement without any notice or reminder to the Licensee if the Licensee violates or fails to perform this Agreement.
However, Articles 5, 6, and 11 shall survive even after the termination.
Article 11 (Jurisdiction)
Any dispute, controversies, or differences between the parties hereto as to interpretation or execution of this Agreement shall be resolved amicably through negotiation
between the parties upon the basis of mutual trust. Should the parties fail to agree within ninety (90) days after notice from one of the parties to the other, both parties
hereby irrevocably submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo District Court (main office) in Japan for settlement of the dispute.
Article 12 (Governing Law)

This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan. The Licensee expressly agrees to waive absolutely and irrevocably and to the
fullest extent permissible under applicable law any rights against the laws of Japan which it may have pursuant to the Licensee’s local law.
Article 13 (Severability)
In the event that any provision hereof is declared or found to be illegal by any court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be null and void with respect
to the jurisdiction of that court or tribunal and all the remaining provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect.
iv IM 720120-61E
How to Use This Manual 1
Structure of the Manual 2

This user’s manual consists of the following sections.
Chapter Title Description
1 What the Acquisition Software Can Do
Gives an overview of the Acquisition Software and the details of its functions. 3
2 Installation
Explains how to install and uninstall the Acquisition Software and how to
install the USB driver.
3 Connecting to an SL1000 4
Explains how to connect the SL1000 Data Acquisition Unit to your PC.
4. Setting the Measurement Conditions
Explains how to set the measurement conditions, trigger functions, GO/
NOGO judgment functions, and alarm functions for each input module and
how to start measurements.
5
5 Recording Measured Data
Explains how to record the measured data.
6 Display
Explains how to display waveforms of measured data and how to set the
6
screen.
7 Analysis
Explains the automated measurement of waveform parameters and how to
read measured values using cursors. 7
8 Saving, Loading, and Transferring Data
Explains how to display waveforms of data measured in the past, how to save
the SL1000’s measured data to your PC, how to save setup data, how to
load previous setup data, how to save computed data and screen captures of 8
measured waveforms, and how to transfer files between the SL1000 and your
PC.
9 Other Functions
Explains how to set the clock, the start-up and exit options, as well as how to
perform a self-test, key lock, initialization, calibration, and the like.
9
10 File Operation
Explains how to merge files, how to divide files, how to accelerate waveform
displaying, how to convert data to CSV files, and so on.
11 Error Messages
10
Lists various error messages.
12 Specifications
Lists the specifications of the Acquisition Software.
Appendix
11
Explains the relationship between the number of data points and acquisition
count, the relationship between the maximum number of measured points
and measuring time, and the relationship between the number of channels
and sample rate. 12
Index
App
Index
IM 720120-61E v
Contents
List of Manuals....................................................................................................................................i
Terms and Conditions of the Software License................................................................................ iii
How to Use This Manual....................................................................................................................v
Chapter 1 What the Acquisition Software Can Do

1.1 Overview of This Software................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Connection & Group Settings............................................................................................ 1-7
1.3 Measurement Settings...................................................................................................... 1-9
1.4 Recording Settings.......................................................................................................... 1-22
1.5 Display Settings............................................................................................................... 1-27
1.6 Triggering........................................................................................................................ 1-28
1.7 Analysis Function............................................................................................................ 1-33
1.8 Alarms............................................................................................................................. 1-35
1.9 GO/NO-GO Judgment (for Triggered Mode)................................................................... 1-37
1.10 X-Y Display...................................................................................................................... 1-38
1.11 Screen Description.......................................................................................................... 1-39
1.12 Other Functions............................................................................................................... 1-43
1.13 Basic Operation............................................................................................................... 1-44
Chapter 2 Installation Procedure

2.1 Recommended PC System............................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Installing or Uninstalling the Acquisition Software............................................................. 2-2
2.3 Installing the USB Driver................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Starting and Exiting the Acquisition Software.................................................................... 2-7
Chapter 3 Connecting to the SL1000

3.1 Connecting Using the USB................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Specifying Communication Settings (When Using the Optional Ethernet Interface)......... 3-2
3.3. Connecting Using the Ethernet Interface (Option)............................................................ 3-4
3.4 Configuring the System..................................................................................................... 3-5
Chapter 4 Specifying Measurement Settings

4.1 Setting the Measuring Mode and Acquisition Mode.......................................................... 4-1
4.2 Measuring the Voltage and Current................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Measuring the Temperature.............................................................................................. 4-8
4.4 Measuring the Strain........................................................................................................4-11
4.5 Measuring the Acceleration............................................................................................. 4-16
4.6 Measuring the Frequency, Number of Rotations, Period, Duty Cycle, Power Supply
Frequency, Pulse Width, Pulse Integration, and Velocity.................................................... 4-18
4.7 Making Measurements Using an External Clock Signal.................................................. 4-34
4.8 Making Measurements Using Triggers............................................................................ 4-36
4.9 Setting the Alarm............................................................................................................. 4-45
4.10 Setting the GO/NO-GO Judgment (for Triggered Mode)................................................. 4-49
4.11 Performing Auto Setup.................................................................................................... 4-52
4.12 Starting and Stopping the Measurement......................................................................... 4-53
vi IM 720120-61E
Contents
Chapter 5 Recording Measured Data 1

5.1 Recording Measured Data Immediately as the Measurement Is Started
(Free Run Mode)............................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Recording Measured Data from a Specified Time (Free Run Mode)................................ 5-6
5.3 Recording Measured Data from When an Alarm Occurs (Free Run Mode)...................... 5-8 2
5.4 Recording by Applying External Trigger Signals (in Free Run Mode)............................. 5-10
5.5 Recording in Triggered Mode.......................................................................................... 5-12
5.6 Recording to Divided Files.............................................................................................. 5-14
3
Chapter 6 Display
6.1 Setting the Display Conditions.......................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Operating the Screen........................................................................................................ 6-6 4
6.3 Expanding and Reducing Waveforms............................................................................. 6-14
6.4 Displaying the Measured Data That Has Been Saved (Excluding the /XV0 Option)....... 6-16
6.5 Starting Xviewer (Excluding the /XV0 Option)................................................................. 6-17
6.6 Displaying the Alarm Log (Free Run Mode).................................................................... 6-18 5
6.7 Accumulating Waveforms and Displaying Snapshots..................................................... 6-20
6.8 Setting Marks.................................................................................................................. 6-22
6.9 Displaying X-Y Waveforms.............................................................................................. 6-24
6
Chapter 7 Analysis
7.1 Reading Measured Values Using Cursors........................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Computing Waveform Parameters (Triggered Mode)....................................................... 7-3 7
Chapter 8 Saving and Loading Data
8.1 Saving and Loading Measured Data................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Saving and Loading Setup Data........................................................................................ 8-3 8
8.3 Saving the SL1000’s Data to Your PC............................................................................... 8-4
8.4 Saving Computed Data..................................................................................................... 8-6
8.5 Saving Waveform Screen Captures.................................................................................. 8-7
9
8.6 Transferring Files between the SL1000s and the PC........................................................ 8-8
Chapter 9 Other Functions

9.1 Synchronizing the Clock with Your PC.............................................................................. 9-1 10
9.2 Automatically Merging Recorded Files (Only during synchronous operation)................... 9-2
9.3 Setting the Software Start-up Options and Exit Options................................................... 9-3
9.4 Performing a Self-Test....................................................................................................... 9-4
9.5 Display the SL1000 Information........................................................................................ 9-6 11
9.6 Displaying the SL1000 System Information...................................................................... 9-7
9.7 Locking the Keys on the SL1000....................................................................................... 9-8
9.8 Initializing the SL1000 Settings......................................................................................... 9-9
12
9.9 Calibrating the SL1000.................................................................................................... 9-10
9.10 Specifying Communication Settings on SL1000s on the Network (Option).....................9-11
9.11 Displaying the Operating Status, Showing and Hiding the Toolbar and Status Bar, and
Undocking the Menu Bar and Toolbar............................................................................. 9-12 App
9.12 Displaying the Software Version...................................................................................... 9-13
Index
IM 720120-61E vii
Contents
Chapter 10 File Operation

10.1 Starting and Exiting the File Utility................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Common Operations....................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 Merging Files................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.4 Dividing Files................................................................................................................. 10-12
10.5 Accelerating Waveform Displaying................................................................................ 10-17
10.6 Converting Waveform Data Files to CSV or Binary Files.............................................. 10-19
Chapter 11 Maintenance
11.1 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Messages.........................................................................................................................11-2
Chapter 12 Specifications
12.1 Connection to the SL1000............................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Measurement Functions.................................................................................................. 12-1
12.3 Trigger Function.............................................................................................................. 12-2
12.4 Recording Function......................................................................................................... 12-3
12.5 Functions......................................................................................................................... 12-4
Appendix
Appendix 1 Number of Data Points and Acquisition Count................................................... App-1
Appendix 2 Maximum Number of Measured Points and Measuring Time............................ App-2
Appendix 3 Number of Channels and Measurement Group Sample Rate........................... App-5
Index
viii IM 720120-61E
Chapter 1 What the Acquisition Software Can Do
1.1 Overview of This Software 1
What the Acquisition Software Can Do

The Acquisition Software is used to connect to an SL1000 via the USB interface or the
optional Ethernet interface and record and display data that the SL1000 has measured. 2
The Acquisition Software allows you to do the following:
• Set measurement and record conditions of an SL1000.
• Start and stop measurements on an SL1000.
• Start and stop recording. 3
• Display waveforms of the measured data, cursor values, and waveform parameters.
Synchronize the operation of up to eight linked SL1000s.
• Start the Xviewer (accompanying software) and display waveforms of data saved in
4
the past (excluding the /XV0 option)
Signal and Data Flow

The signal and data flow between this software and the SL1000 is described below. 5
PC
SL1000
Display
Communication
Display data process 6
Measured raw data
Current value data Measured raw data
Display data
Measured raw data 7
Current value data
Measurement file
HDD
Signal to be measured
8
Display Data
P-P compression data that the SL1000 creates for displaying waveforms. The data is
sent to your PC in unit of measuring groups. For a description of display groups, see
section 1.5.
9
Measured Raw Data
All the measured data that the SL1000 acquired. The data is sent to your PC in unit of
measuring groups to save the data on the hard disk of your PC. For a description of 10
measuring groups, see section 1.2.
The data is used in data analysis such as cursor measurements and waveform
parameter computations.
11
Current Value Data
The current values that the SL1000 calculated. The data is sent immediately upon a
request from your PC.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-1
1.1 Overview of This Software
Measurement and Recording

This software refers to the task of acquiring measured data into the internal memory of
an SL1000 as measurement and the task of saving the measured data that has been
acquired to the internal memory of an SL1000 as files on your PC’s hard disk or the
internal hard disk of an SL1000 while making measurements as recording.
The measured data acquired in the internal memory of an SL1000 is cleared when the
power is turn ON/OFF or when measurement is resumed. The waveform screen of this
software displays waveforms of measured data acquired to the internal memory of an
SL1000 after applying P-P compression.
PC
Display
SL1000
Record
Memory HDD

HDD Record
Measure
Signal to be measured
After the measurement stops, all the measured data acquired in the internal memory of
an SL1000 can be saved as a single file on your PC. This task is referred to as saving
not recording in which data is saved while the measurement is in progress.
Connecting to an SL1000
The USB can be used to connect your PC directly to an SL1000 or the optional Ethernet
interface can be used to connect to an SL1000 over the network.
Only a single SL1000 can be connected to a single PC.
Note
• Remove the USB or Ethernet cable that is connecting the SL1000 to the PC only after you
have exited the Acquisition Software or after you have disconnected the communication
between the SL1000 and the PC.
• In the default setting of the SL1000, the DHCP function is turned ON. You can immediately
connect an SL1000 to your PC by connecting the SL1000 to a network with a DHCP server.
• An exclusive driver is necessary to connect using the USB. If an SL1000 is connected
to your PC via the USB, an installation wizard starts. Install the driver according to the
instructions on the screen. For details, see section 2.3, “Installing the USB Driver.”
• You cannot connect both Ethernet and USB interfaces simultaneously to an SL1000.
You cannot connect to the SL1000 that this software is connected to via USB, using the
accompanying Xviewer (excluding /XV0) application nor using FTP.
• When connecting an SL1000 to the PC, disable the PC standby mode. If it is enabled, the
connection between the SL1000 and the PC may be disconnected.
1-2 IM 720120-61E
Synchronous Operation 1
You can synchronize the operation of up to eight SL1000s by connecting them using

the following synchronous connecting cable that are sold separately: 720901-01 (1 m in
length) or 720901-02 (3 m in length).
For instructions on how to connect the SL1000s to your PC for synchronous operation 2
and for details on the sync I/O connectors (SYNC IN and SYNC OUT), see the SL1000
High-Speed Data Acquisition Unit User’s Manual (IM 720120-01E).
3
PC
USB/Ethernet
4
Same GROUP ID (0 to F)
Master Slave #1 Slave #2 Slave #7
• External clock input UNIT-ID=0 UNIT-ID=1 UNIT-ID=2 UNIT-ID=7
• External trigger
input 5
• Trigger output
• Alarm output
SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC
OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN 6
Record Record Record Record
Signal input Signal input Signal input Signal input

(Trigger source, (Trigger source, (Trigger source, (Trigger source,
Alarm source) HDD Alarm source) HDD Alarm source) HDD Alarm source) HDD 7
Trigger sources and alarm sources can be combined between units (using AND or OR logic).
The external clock input and external trigger input synchronize with the signals from the
8
master unit. Trigger sources and alarm sources are combined using AND or OR logic
between units, and are transmitted from the master unit’s trigger output and alarm output.
The slave units’ external clock input, external trigger input, trigger output, and alarm
output are invalid. 9
Synchronized Items
• Measurement and recording start and stop
• Clock 10
Slave units synchronize to the master unit’s external or internal clock.
• Time (The time of the slave unit is synchronized with the time of the master unit.)
• Triggering
The AND or OR logic of the master unit’s external trigger input and slave units’ trigger 11
sources.
When the SL1000 triggers, the trigger signal is transmitted from the master unit’s
trigger output.
• Alarms
12
The AND or OR logic of the slave units’ channel alarm conditions or the OR logic of
the slave units’ system alarm conditions.
When an alarm occurs, an alarm signal is transmitted from the master unit’s alarm
App
output.
• Detection of sync cable disconnection and of units powering-off
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-3
Note
• You cannot specify Single (N) of Triggered Mode.
• You cannot set the auto recording destination to PC HDD+Unit HDD.
• You cannot set the GO/NO-GO judgment output.
• When the save destination is set to Unit HDD, the recording files are saved to each unit’s
hard disk.
• To perform synchronous operation, set the master and slave units to the same group ID (from
0 to F). Set the master unit’s unit ID to 0, and slave units’ unit IDs in ascending order from
1 to 7. For details, see section 4.1 in the SL1000 High-Speed Data Acquisition Unit User’s
Manual (IM 720120-01E).
• Connect or disconnect the synchronous connecting cable only after (1) you have exited the
Acquisition Software or disconnected the communication between the SL1000 and PC and (2)
you have turn the SL1000 off.
Workflow
The workflow to make measurements using the Acquisition Software varies depending
on whether it is the first time that you are connecting to the SL1000.
If Connecting to the SL1000 for the First Time

Connect to the SL1000 via the USB (IM 720120-01E, a separate manual)
Install the USB driver (section 2.3)
Connect via the Ethernet network (option)

Connect via the USB
Set the communication parameters (TCP/IP) (section 3.2)
Set the connection method to Ethernet on (section 3.4)

the Connection & Group Settings screen
Connect to the SL1000 via the Ethernet network
(IM 720120-01E, a separate manual)
Configure the system Set the measuring group

(Register the channels that will acquire measured data)
Set the measuring mode (section 4.1)

Set the measurement conditions Set the acquisition mode (sections 4.1 and 4.8)
Set the clock source (sections 4.1 and 4.7)
Set the sample rate and sample interval (sections 4.2 to 4.6)
Set the measuring range, input coupling, and the like
(section 4.2 to 4.6)
Set the external clock (section 4.7)
Set the trigger (section 4.8)
Set the alarm (section 4.9)
Set GO/NOGO (section 4.10)
Set the record conditions Set the recording destination (chapter 5)
Set the recording start/stop conditions
(for Free Run mode, sections 5.1 to 5.4)
Set the repeat conditions (for Free Run mode, sections 5.1 to 5.4)
Set file information (chapter 5)
Set the display conditions Set the display group (section 6.1)
(Register the channels to be displayed on a waveform screen)
Set the scale (section 6.1)
Set the zone (section 6.1)
Set the waveform color and thickness (section 6.1)
Set the vertical and horizontal axes (section 6.1)
Start measurement
Start recording
1-4 IM 720120-61E
If Reconnecting to the SL1000 1

Connect to the SL1000 (IM 720120-01E, a separate manual)

Start the Acquisition Software (section 2.2) 2
When the SL1000 is started with the
previous setup file (section 9.2) When making measurements by changing the measurement conditions
3
Change the settings as necessary
Configure the system
4
Set the measurement conditions
Set the record conditions 5
Set the display conditions

6
Start measurement Start measurement
Start recording Start recording 7
* For details on each setup item, see the operation flow diagram “Connecting to the SL1000 for the First Time.”
8
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-5
Setup in Wizard Format

The basic setup consisting of connection and group settings, measurement settings,
recording settings, and display settings can be specified easily using dialog boxes in
wizard format. You can also specify the connection and group settings, measurement
settings, recording settings, and display settings individually using the toolbar or menu
bar.
Acquisition menu
Connection & Group
Settings screen
For the operating procedure,
see chapter 3.
[NEXT] [Back]
Acquisition menu
Measurement Settings screen

see chapter 4.
[NEXT] [Back]
Recording Settings screen Acquisition menu

see chapter 5.
[NEXT] [Back]
Display Settings screen Acquisition menu

see chapter 6.
1-6 IM 720120-61E
1.2 Connection & Group Settings 1

Connection Method
Select USB or Ethernet for the interface used to communicate the SL1000. This software 2
can communicate with the SL1000 that is connected to the selected interface.
The Ethernet interface can be used on an SL1000 with the /C10 option.
3
Searching for an SL1000
Search for an SL1000 that is to communicate with your PC.
If connected using the USB, you can search for an SL1000 by specifying a group ID.
If connected using the Ethernet interface, you can search by specifying a group ID and 4
IP address.
Group ID
A number assigned to the SL1000. Group IDs are used to identify different SL1000s
connected to the network. 5
There are 16 group IDs: 0 to 9 and A to F.
You can also search for an SL1000 without specifying a group ID.
To perform synchronous operation, set the master and slave units to the same group ID.
6
Unit ID
A number assigned to the SL1000.
The unit ID cannot be specified when searching.
To perform synchronous operation, set the unit ID of the master unit to 0, and the unit ID 7
of the slave units to 1 to 7 in ascending order.

PC 8
USB/Ethernet
Group ID = 0 Group ID = 1 Group ID = F

9
SL1000 SL1000 SL1000 SL1000 SL1000 SL1000 SL1000 SL1000 SL1000
master slave slave master slave slave master slave slave
Unit ID = 0 Unit ID = 1 Unit ID = 7 Unit ID = 0 Unit ID = 1 Unit ID = 7 Unit ID = 0 Unit ID = 1 Unit ID = 7
10
For details on the group ID and unit ID, see the SL1000 High-Speed Data Acquisition
Unit User’s Manual (IM 720120-01E).
IP Address 11
You can search by specifying an IP address assigned to the SL1000.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-7
1.2 Connection & Group Settings
Measuring Groups
Modules installed in a connected SL1000 are registered to measuring groups according
to the sample rate used to make measurements. Up to four measuring groups can be set
up.
Measurement is performed only on modules that are registered to measuring groups.
Below is an example of how modules can be registered to measuring groups.
SL1000
Measuring group 1 Measuring group 4

Measuring group 3
Measuring group 2
1-8 IM 720120-61E
1.3 Measurement Settings 1

Measuring Mode
There are two measuring modes: Free Run and Triggered. 2
Free Run Mode
Data is acquired immediately upon starting a measurement. The SL1000 continues to
acquire data until the measurement is stopped.
The measured data can also be recorded to the hard disk of the SL1000 or your PC at a
3
specified time or when an alarm occurs.
The following functions are not available in Free Run mode.
• GO/NO-GO function 4
• Automated measurement of waveform parameters
• Zoom on a particular section of the waveform.
Triggered Mode
After starting the measurement, the SL1000 acquires data when a trigger condition is
5
met. After acquiring data over the specified measuring time, data acquisition stops. You
can also record the measured data acquired in Triggered Mode to the hard disk of the
SL1000 or your PC.
6
If Triggered Mode is used, you can perform automated measurement of waveform
parameters and zoom in on waveforms.
For details on triggers, see section 1.6, “Triggering.”
The following functions are not available in Triggered Mode. 7
• Channel alarm.
• Recording start and end condition settings.
Acquisition Mode 8
When acquiring measured data in the internal memory of the SL1000, it is possible to
perform processing on data and display waveforms based on the processed data. The
following three types of data processing are available.
Normal Mode 9
In this mode, measured data is acquired without special processing.
Envelope Mode
If measuring at a sample rate lower than the maximum sampling rate of each input 10
module, the SL1000 samples data at 100 S/s internally, determines the maximum and
minimum values among the measured values over each sample interval at the specified
sample rate, and acquires them as pairs.
This mode is effective when you want to avoid aliasing because the sample rate is 11
essentially kept high. It is also effective when you want to detect glitches (pulse signals
which rise very fast) or display an envelope of a modulating signal.
Input signal
Normal mode 12
App
Envelope mode Maximum value
B b Minimum value
A Index
a
Measurement points at the specified sample rate

Measurement points at the maximum sample rate of the module
IM 720120-61E 1-9
1.3 Measurement Settings
Input modules with a maximum sample rate less than 100 MS/s cannot acquire data
at certain points even if the internal sampling rate is 100 MS/s. The data at points that
cannot be sampled will take on the same value as the previous measured data.
Envelope Mode has no effect if measuring at a sample rate higher than the maximum
sample rate of the input module.
Box Average Mode

This mode is available on the 701250 (HS10M12), 701255 (NONISO_10M12), 720210
(HS100M12), and 720211 (HS100M12). In this mode, the SL1000 determines the moving
average of the data sampled at the maximum sample rate and acquires and displays the
resultant data. Box averaging is effective in eliminating small amounts of noise from the
input signal. It can also remove noise from a single-shot signal.
Input signal (500 kS/s) • • • • 36 • • • •

21
• • • 20
2 • • • • •
1
Voltage
Time

Box averaged data
b
Voltage
Time
Clock Source
Internal Clock
The sampling timing of the measured data is controlled using the clock signal (internal
clock) that is generated from the internal time-base circuit of the SL1000.
External Clock
The sampling timing of the measured data is controlled using a clock signal applied
externally. This mode is available when the acquisition mode is set to Normal.
The external clock input is useful for observing a signal whose period varies or for
observing waveforms by synchronizing to the clock signal of the signal being measured.
The maximum frequency that can be used for the external clock varies depending on the
module.
720210/720211: 5 MHz
701250/701251/701255: 1 MHz
701267/701270/701271/701275: 100 kHz
701281: 1 MHz
701261/701262: 100 kHz when measuring voltage
500 Hz when measuring temperature
701265: 500 Hz
If an external clock that exceeds the maximum frequency is applied, the data is sampled
at the maximum frequency, and the measured data at times when data cannot be
sampled is set to the same value as the previous sampled data.
When using an external clock, the time axis unit becomes the number of measured
points, not time. Therefore, the measuring time is set and the cursor measurement
values are displayed in terms of the number of measured points.
1-10 IM 720120-61E
Sample Rate and Sample Interval 1

You can set the sample rate or sample interval for each measuring group.

The sample rate (the number of samples per second in unit of S/s) is related to the
sample interval as follows:
Sample rate = 1/sample interval 2
The maximum sample rate varies depending on the module. If you set a sample rate that
exceeds the maximum sample rate of a module, data cannot be acquired at the specified
sample rate. The data at times when data cannot be acquired is set to the same value as
the previous acquired data.
3
Input signal 4
Measured data
Data that is actually acquired
Data that is not actually acquired

5
Sampling timing at the specified
sample rate
Sampling timing at the maximum 6
sample rate of the module
Note
If the sample rate of measuring group 1 is set to 50 MS/s, 5 MS/s, 500 kS/s, 50 kS/s, 5 kS/s, 7
500 S/s, or 50 S/s, the sample rate of other groups cannot be set to the next lower sample rate.
For example, if the sample rate of measuring group 1 is set to 500 kS/s, the sample rate of
other measuring groups cannot be set to 200 kS/s (the next lower sample rate).
8
The SL1000 can display waveforms correctly for frequencies less than one-half the
sample rate as defined by the Nyquist sampling theorem.*
* If the sample rate is comparatively low with respect to the input signal frequency,
the harmonics contained in the signal are lost. In this case, some of the harmonics 9
will appear at low frequencies due to the effects described by the Nyquist sampling
theorem. This phenomenon is called aliasing. You can avoid aliasing by acquiring
waveforms with the acquisition mode set to envelope.
10
Aliasing signal Input signal Sampling point

11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-11
Input Coupling
If you want to measure only the amplitude of an AC signal, measurement is easier if the
DC component is removed from the input signal. On the other hand, there are times
when you want to check the ground level or measure the entire input signal (both the DC
and AC components). You can change the input coupling setting to meet your application
needs. By changing this setting, the way in which the vertical control circuit (voltage axis)
receives the input signal is switched. The following types of input coupling are available.
DC
The input signal is directly coupled to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit. Select
DC if you want to measure the entire input signal (DC and AC components).
AC (Only When Measuring the AC Voltage)

The input signal is coupled to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit through
a capacitor. Select AC if you want to measure only the amplitude of the AC signal,
eliminating the DC components from the input signal.
GND
Input signal is coupled to the ground not to the attenuator of the vertical control circuit.
Select GND to check the ground level on the screen.
DC AC GND
Input Input Input
terminal Vertical terminal Vertical terminal Vertical
control control control
circuit circuit circuit
1 MΩ 1 MΩ
TC (Only When Measuring the Temperature)

Select TC if you are measuring the temperature using the 701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262
(UNIVERSAL (AAF)), or 701265 (TEMP/HPV).
DC-RMS
Using the 701267 (HV (with RMS)), both the DC and AC components of the signal are
converted to rms values and displayed. An RMS conversion circuit is connected to the
vertical control circuit of the same input coupling circuit used when the coupling is set to
DC.
AC-RMS
Using the 701267 (HV (with RMS)), only the AC component of the signal is converted to
rms values and displayed. An RMS conversion circuit is connected to the vertical control
circuit of the same input coupling circuit used when the coupling is set to AC.
DC-RMS AC-RMS
Input Input
terminal Vertical RMS terminal Vertical RMS
control conversion AD control conversion AD

circuit circuit circuit circuit
1 MΩ 1 MΩ
ACCL (Only When Measuring Acceleration)

Select ACCL when measuring acceleration on the 701275 (ACCL/VOLT).
1-12 IM 720120-61E
Probe Attenuation and Current-to-Voltage Conversion Ratio 1

For voltage (current) measurement, a probe is normally used in connecting the circuit

being measured to the signal input terminal. Using a probe has the following advantages.
• Prevents disturbing the voltage and current of the circuit being measured.
• Applies the signal with no distortion. 2
• Expands the measurable voltage (current) range of the SL1000.
When using a probe, the attenuation setting on the SL1000 must be set equal to the
probe attenuation or current-to-voltage conversion ratio so that the measured voltage 3
(current) can be read directly.
Set the probe attenuation for the accessory probes (sold separately) as follows:
• Isolated probe (700929): 10:1 4
• Current probe (700937 and 701933): 10 A:1 V
• Current probe (701930 and 701931): 100 A:1 V
• 10:1 Passive Probe for the DL750/DL750P (701940): 10:1
The SL1000 has the following attenuation settings: 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1, 1A:1V1,
5
10A:1V2, and 100A:1V.3 If you are using a probe other than the ones provided as
accessories (sold separately), set the attenuation ratio on the SL1000 according to the
attenuation of the probe. 6
1 Output voltage rate: 1 V/A
2 Output voltage rate: 0.1 V/A
3 Output voltage rate: 0.01 V/A
7
Note
Use a probe that matches the input capacity of each module. Otherwise, the capacity cannot
be adjusted.
8
Measuring Range
Set the measuring range according to the input signal.
Select a TC type when measuring temperature. 9
Bandwidth Limit
You can set a upper bandwidth limit on the analog signal for each channel. This allows
you to observe waveforms with noise components above the specified frequency
removed.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-13
Linear Scaling
The measured data can be scaled to any physical value and displayed.
When measuring the voltage (current), strain, or frequency (number of rotations, period,
duty cycle, power supply frequency, pulse width, pulse integration, and velocity), there
are two methods of linear scaling: “aX+b” and “P1-P2.”
aX+b
The results obtained from the following computation based on the specified scaling
coefficient a and offset b are displayed as cursor measurement values and automated
measurement values of waveform parameters. You can also assign a unit to the result of
linear scaling.
Y = aX + b
P1-P2
Specify arbitrary scale values (P1Y and P2Y) for the measured values of two arbitrary
points (P1X and P2X). The scale conversion equation (y = ax + b) is derived from these
four values.
• Range of measured values (P1X and P2X): –9.99990E+25 to +9.99990E+25
• Range of scaled values (P1Y and P2Y): –9.99990E+25 to +9.99990E+25
• Initial setting of scale values: P1X +0.0000E+00, P1Y +0.0000E+00
P2X +1.0000E+00, P2Y +1.0000E+00
Scale value y = ax + b
P2
P2Y
P1Y P1
Measured value
P1X P2X
Measuring range
Inversion
When measuring voltage or strain, the waveform can be displayed with the vertical axis
inverted around the ground level or the strain balance level as shown below.
Normal display Inverted display
Ground level or
strain balance level
1-14 IM 720120-61E
RMS Measurement 1
If the module is 701267 (HV(with RMS)), you can observer the RMS value of the input

signal.
AC-RMS
This setting is used when you want to observe only the rms values of the AC signal, 2
eliminating the DC components from the input signal.
Example
If the rms value of a 2-Vpeak sinusoid input signal is measured, a DC waveform at
3
approximately 1.4 V is displayed (see right figure).
2 Vpeak Approx. 1.4 V
5
The rms value is derived from the following equation:
T
1 u(t)2 dt where u(t) is the input signal and T is one period of the input signal.
T 0 6
Given u(t) = Vmsinwt where Vm is the peak value, w is the angular velocity (which is
equal to 2pf where f is the frequency of the sinusoid signal), the rms value, Vrms, is
Vrms = 2 1 2π 2
(Vmsinωt) dωt = Vm
7
The average of u(t) over one cycle = 2π
0
2
As in the above example, when Vm is 2 V, the rms value, Vrms, is approximately 1.4 V.
8
DC-RMS
This setting is used when you want to observe the rms values of both the DC and AC
components of the input signal.
Example 9
If the rms value of a 2-Vpeak sinusoid input signal riding on top of a 1-V DC component
is measured, a DC waveform at approximately 1.7 V is displayed (see right figure).
2 Vpeak + 1 Vdc Approx. 1.7 V 10

11
If the DC component is expressed as Vdc and the AC component as u(t) = Vmsinwt, the
rms value, Vrms (+DC), of the sinusoid input signal riding on top of the DC component is 12
derived from the following equation:
2π
1 2 Vm 2 2
Vrms(+DC) = (Vmsinωt+Vdc) dωt = + (Vdc)
2π 2
0
App
As in the above example, when Vdc is 1 V and Vm is 2 V, the rms value, Vrms (+DC), is
approximately 1.7 V.
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-15
Temperature Measurement
Thermocouple Type
The following types of thermocouples are available.
K, E, J, T, L, U, R, S, B, N, W, and Au7Fe
Selectable Temperature Units

You can select °C or K.
Reference Junction Compensation (RJC)

The voltage generated by a thermocouple depends on the temperature of the point of
measurement and the reference junction temperature. In this case, the function used
to compensate the temperature on the measurement instrument to the cold junction is
referred to as reference junction compensation.
You can turn ON/OFF the internal RJC circuit of the SL1000.
ON: Use this setting to enable the reference junction compensation by the internal
RJC circuit.
OFF: Select this setting when checking the temperature measurement value or when
using an external reference junction (0 °C).
Burnout
Specify the behavior when the thermocouple input detects a burnout.
ON: Fix the measured value to the upper limit of the measurement range of each
thermocouple if a burnout is detected.
OFF: Not detect burnouts.
1-16 IM 720120-61E
Strain Measurement 1
You can measure strain by connecting a strain gauge bridge (bridge head) or a

strain gauge transducer to the strain module (701270 (STRAIN_NDIS) or 701271
(STRAIN_DSUB)).
Relationship between the Strain (μSTR) and the Transducer Output (mV/V) 2
The SL1000 allows the unit to be changed between “the strain unit (μSTR: ×10–6 strain)”
and “the output unit of the strain gauge transducer (mV/V)1.” The default setting is “strain
(μSTR).” The following relationship exists between μSTR and mV/V.
3
(mV/V) = 0.5×(μSTR)/1000
Example
500(μSTR) → 0.5×500(μSTR)/1000 = 0.25 (mV/V)
Gauge Factor If mV/V Is Selected

4
K=2
You can set the gauge factor to any value on the SL1000. However, if there are no
specifications on the strain gauge transducer, set K to 2. 5
If K is not 2, e is derived in the SL1000 using the following equation.
e = (4/K)×(V/E)
e: Measured value of the strain gauge transducer [mV/V]
V: Voltage measured on the bridge [V] 6
E: Voltage applied to the bridge [V]
K: Gauge factor
If you switch the unit, the unit of all related parameters of the channel is switched
accordingly. 7
• Scale
• Trigger level
• Values of automated measurement of waveform parameters and cursor
8
measurements, etc.
In addition, the 701271 (STRAIN_DSUB) supports shunt calibration.2
1 The unit corresponding to the output of the strain gauge transducer. A value expressing
the transducer output per volt applied to the bridge in mV. You can set the bridge voltage 9
(excitation: voltage applied to the bridge) from 2 V, 5 V, and 10 V on the SL1000. However,
since the mV/V value is a converted value, the measured value is basically constant.
2 Shunt calibration refers to the act of correcting the gain of the strain measurement by
connecting a known resistance (shunt calibration resistance) to the strain gauge in parallel. 10
For a description of the basic defining equation of strain and shunt calibration, see the
SL1000 High-Speed Data Acquisition Unit User’s Manual (IM 720120-01E)
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-17
Acceleration Measurement
The Acceleration Module (with AAF) (701275 (ACCL/VOLT)) measures acceleration
using the output signal from an acceleration sensor. Direction connection is possible to
a built-in amplifier type acceleration sensor. (A charge output type acceleration sensor
that does not have a built-in amplifier cannot be connected directly to the 701275 (ACCL/
VOLT). For details on how to connect acceleration sensors, see the SL1000 High-Speed
Data Acquisition Unit User’s Manual (IM 720120-01E).)
Note
The 701275 (ACCL/VOLT) can also measure voltage.
Current Supply to Acceleration Sensors

The 701275 (ACCL/VOLT) can supply 4 mA of current to the acceleration sensor when
measuring acceleration.
Note
If you supply current to the acceleration sensor before it is connected to the item under
measurement, the internal circuit of the acceleration sensor may be damaged. Be sure to
supply current after connecting the acceleration sensor.
Filter
If you set the bandwidth limit to Auto, the anti-aliasing filter (AAF) and low-pass filter are
enabled depending on the sample rate to eliminate high-frequency noise from the input
signal. Using the anti-aliasing filter when measuring voltage allows elimination of aliasing
noise. For details on the bandwidth limit, see section 4.2.
Note
The filter is effective not only during acceleration measurement but also during voltage
measurement.
1-18 IM 720120-61E
Frequency Measurement 1
The Frequency Module (701281 (FREQ)) measures frequency, number of rotations,

period, duty cycle, power supply frequency, pulse width, pulse integration, and velocity.
Measured Item
Frequency
2
Frequency F (Hz) = 1/Tw (s)
Measurable range: 0.01 Hz to 500 kHz
Tw(s)
3

RPMs/RPSs
4
RPMs = Frequency (Hz)/the number of pulses per rotation (Nr) × 60
Measurable range: 0.01 rpm to 100000 rpm
RPSs = Frequency (Hz)/the number of pulses per rotation (Nr)
Measurable range: 0.001 rps to 2000 rps 5
F(Hz)

Nr: The number
of pulses per rotation 6
Period
Period (s) = Tw (s)
Measurable range: 2 μs to 50 s 7
Duty
Duty cycle (%) = Thigh (s)/Tw (s) or
Duty cycle (%) = Tlow (s)/Tw (s) 8
Measurable range: 0% to 100%
Tw(s)
Thigh(s) Tlow(s)

9
Power Supply Frequency

Power supply frequency (Hz) = 1/Tw (s)
Resolution: 0.01 Hz
10
Measurable range: (50 Hz, 60 Hz, 400 Hz)±20 Hz
Tw(s)
11
Pulse Width
Pulse width (s) = Thigh (s) or
pulse width (s) = Tlow (s) 12
Measurable range: 1 μs to 50 s
Thigh(s) Tlow(s)

App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-19
Pulse Integration (Distance/Flow Rate)

Pulse integrated value = N (count) × physical amount per pulse (I)
Set the physical amount per pulse (I) to distance or flow rate.
A suitable user-defined unit can be assigned to the specified physical amount.
Measurable range: up to 2×109 counts
N (count)
l
Velocity
Velocity (km/h) = Distance per pulse l (km)/Tw (s) × 3600
Velocity (m/s) = Distance per pulse l (m)/Tw (s)
The distance and unit can be defined by the user (angular velocity, etc.).
Measurable range: F (=1/Tw) = 0.01 Hz to 500 kHz
Tw(s)

Distance per
pulse (l)
Decelerating Prediction and Stop Prediction

The 701281 (FREQ) automatically performs internal computation and displays
waveforms by predicting the deceleration curve and stop point even when the input pulse
is suddenly cut off. This function allows the measurement of waveforms of deceleration
behavior that is close to the actual physical phenomenon in applications in which the
deceleration behavior of an object that have inertia is measured such as in the brake test
of automobiles.
Decelerating Prediction
The deceleration curve is computed according to the following equation using the
elapsed time after the pulse input stops (Δt).
Frequency (f) = 1/period (Δt)
The decelerating prediction starts after a pulse period (T) of the pulse one period
before the pulse input stopped elapses after the pulse input stopped.
Stop Prediction
The function determines the stop point at a constant time after the pulse input stops,
and the frequency is set to 0. The time from the point when the pulse input stops to
the point when the function determines that the object has stopped can be set to ×1.5,
×2, ×3, ... , ×9, and ×10 (10 settings) of the pulse period (T) of the pulse one period
before the pulse input stopped.
Pulse input stop
T×n
n: 1.5 to 10
f0 T
Decelerating
prediction
t f = 1/ t
Stop prediction
1-20 IM 720120-61E
Filter 1
Smoothing filter (moving average)

The frequency module can display waveforms by taking the moving average of the data
in realtime. The order of moving average can be set in terms of time in the range of 0.0
ms to 1 s (up to 25000th order). The order of moving average is equal to the specified 2
time divided by 40 μs.
The smoothing filter has the following characteristics.
• Converts a waveform that changes in steps to a smooth waveform.
• Improves the resolution by reducing the measurement jitter. The resolution improves
3
especially when measuring high frequencies or when expanding the display using the
offset function. Consequently, highly accurate measurements can be made.
• Can be used on all measurement parameters of the frequency module. 4
If the smoothing filter is used
Original waveform 6
7
Pulse Average
Measures the input pulse by dividing the pulse by the specified number of pulses (1 to
4096 pulses). The pulse average has the following characteristics.
• If pulse dropouts are present or pulse interval is fluctuating within a period, 8
measurements can be made by eliminating the effects from the dropout or fluctuation
(fluctuating component of the waveform used to measure the frequency or period).
• The measured result is displayed as a value per input pulse even when pulse average
is used. Therefore, there is no need to perform scaling again. 9
• Can be used when measuring frequency, number of rotations, period, power supply
frequency, pulse integration, and velocity.
10
N = 11 11
f3
f2
f1 If pulse average is used
If pulse average is not used 12

Offset Function
The 701281 (FREQ) allows you to set the center of observation (offset value) and
expand the area around the offset value for close observation. It allows you to measure App
the fluctuation around a certain frequency. You can set an offset value up to 100 times
the measuring range (500 kHz maximum).
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-21
1.4 Recording Settings
Recording Methods
There are two recording methods. One method is to record automatically according to
the specified conditions (auto recording). The other method is to save the measured
data that has been acquired in the memory of the SL1000 through file operation after the
measurement is finished (saving of waveform data).
Auto Recording
The measured data is automatically recorded to a specified hard disk.
You can select the recording destination from the following three destinations:
• PC HDD: Records to the hard disk of the PC in which this software was
installed.
• Unit HDD: Records to the hard disk of the SL1000.
• PC HDD+Unit HDD: Records both to the hard disk of your PC and to the hard disk
of the SL1000.
The free space on the hard disk of your PC and the SL1000 can be displayed on the
screen.
Note
During synchronous operation, you cannot select PC HDD+Unit HDD.
Saving the Waveform Data

The measured data acquired in the internal memory of the SL1000 is saved to your PC.
All the measured data in the memory is saved as a single file.
The data saved to the hard disk of the SL1000 can be copied to the hard disk of your
PC using the accompanying Xviewer (except the /XV0 option) or the FTP function (/C10
option).
Recording Start and Stop Conditions (Auto Recording)

The recording start and stop conditions vary depending on the measuring mode.
In Free Run Mode
You can select the following recording start and stop conditions.
Recording start condition
Immediate: Starts recording as soon as it is ready to record.
Abs.Time: Starts recording at a specified time if it is ready to record.
Alarm: Starts recording when an alarm occurs if it is ready to record.
External trigger: Starts recording when the SL1000 is ready to record and it receives
a recording control signal (edge signal or gate signal) through the
trigger input terminal. (Rise) indicates rising edge trigger, and (Fall)
indicates falling edge trigger.
* The SL1000 will be ready to record if you click the Start Recording button or choose
Start Recording from the Acquisition menu.
Recording stop condition
Continuous: Continues to record until recording is manually stopped.
Abs.Time: Continues to record to a specified time.
Recording time: Continues to record for a specified time. When measuring with an
external clock, measurement is performed up to a specified number
of measured points.
Alarm: Continues to record until the alarm is cleared.
External trigger: Stops recording when the SL1000 receives a recording control signal
(edge signal or gate signal) through the trigger input terminal. (Rise)
indicates rising edge trigger, and (Fall) indicates falling edge trigger.
1-22 IM 720120-61E
In Trigger Mode 1
The SL1000 will start measuring or recording if the trigger conditions are met when the

SL1000 is ready to record.* When a specified measuring time arrives, measurement and
recording will stop. The SL1000 can also start measuring or recording after a given time
elapses from when the trigger condition is met. 2
3
Repeat Condition (Auto Recording)
When recording the measured data repetitively, you can specify the repeat count and the
repeat interval.
Record Interval 4
The record interval can be specified only if the recording start condition is set to
Immediate or Abs. Time and the recording stop condition is Recording Time. You can
specify the time (the number of measured points if measuring using an external clock
signal) from when the recording is started until the next recording is started. This is 5
available when the measuring mode is set to Free Run.
Record Count
The number of recordings. You can set it if 6
• The recording stop condition is set to Recording time.
• The recording start and stop conditions are set to Alarm.
• The recording start and end conditions are both External Trigger (Rise) or both
External Trigger (Fall).
7
The record count is valid when the measuring mode is set to Free Run.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-23
Relationship between Measurement and Recording (Auto Recording)

Free Run Mode
The recording of the measured data is enabled when measurement is in progress.
Examples of the measurement state, recording start and stop conditions, and repeat
conditions are given below.
If Recording Start Condition Is Immediate and Recording Stop Condition Is
Continuous
ACQ Start ACQ Stop

Measurement in progress
Measurement state Rec Start

Recordable
Record state
Records the measured data
Recording Start and Stop Conditions Other Than Those Above
ACQ Start ACQ Stop

Measurement state Rec Start Rec Stop

Recordable

Record state
Recording start condition met Recording stop condition met
If Recording Is Stopped before the Recording Stop Condition Is Met
ACQ Start ACQ Stop


Recordable

Record state
Recording start condition met Recording stop condition met
1-24 IM 720120-61E
Relationship with the Repeat Condition 1

If repeat interval is set for the repeat condition

(If the recording start condition is set to Immediate or Abs. Time and the recording stop
condition is Recording Time)
ACQ Start Measurement in progress
ACQ Stop 2
Recordable
Record interval
3
Record state
Records the Records the
measured data measured data Recording start
condition met

Recording stop 4
condition met
If repeat interval is not set for the repeat condition
ACQ Start ACQ Stop
5
Recordable
Records the Records the

Record state
measured data measured data 6
Recording start
condition met
Recording stop
condition met
7
Note
To record measured data continuously, set the interval of the repeat condition to OFF when the
recording start condition is set to Immediate or Abs.Time and the recording stop condition is
set to Recording Time. 8
Triggered Mode
Measurement and recording are performed for a specified time if a trigger occurs when
the SL1000 is ready to measure and record. 9
If a trigger occurs when the SL1000 is not ready to record, only measurement is
performed.
ACQ Start Measurable

ACQ Stop
10
Recordable

Record state Measures/records Measures/records 11
over the specified time over the specified time
Trigger condition met

12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-25
File Name and Recording Destination

To Use the Date/Time in the File Name
The date/time (ms unit) of the recording is used for the file name. An arbitrary file name
cannot be specified.
In Free Run Mode
20070630_121530_100_000 (2007/06/30 12:15:30.100)
Year Sequence number when a single file
Month exceeds 2 GB (000 to 999)
Day ms
Second
Minute
Hour
In Triggered Mode
20070630_121530_100 (2007/06/30 12:15:30.100)
Year ms
Month Second
Day Minute
Hour
To Use a Sequence Number in the File Name
A sequence number is added to a file name that you specify.
In Free Run Mode

TEST01000_000
Sequence number when a single file exceeds 2 GB (000 to 999)
Sequence number (000 to 999)
Character string
In Triggered Mode
TEST01000
Character string
Recording Destination
When recording to the hard disk of your PC, you can specify the save destination folder.
This software creates a folder with the following name within the specified folder and
saves the data.
20070630_000 (June 30, 2007, the sequence number is 000 to 999)

Year
Sequence number
Month
Day
File Order
There are two methods for recording measured data to the hard disk of your PC or the
SL1000: sequential and cyclic.
Sequential
Records the files sequentially to the hard disk. This method is useful if you want to retain
the old data. If the number of recordings is large, the free space on the hard disk may run
out.
Cyclic
Records the specified number of files. If the specified number is exceeded, the file is
overwritten in order from the oldest one. This method is useful if the free space on the
hard disk is low.
1-26 IM 720120-61E
1.5 Display Settings 1

Display Group
The data measured on measuring channels that are registered to measuring groups 2
can be divided into four groups (display groups) to be displayed. Channels of different
measuring groups can be registered in a same display group. A single group can contain
up to 16 channels (up to 128 channels when eight units are linked during synchronous
operation). The same channel can also be registered to multiple groups.
3
The measured data of channels in the same group (display group 1) can be compared
using cursor values and values obtained through automated measurement of waveform
parameters. 4
Note
If the maximum sample rate among the measuring channels registered to a single display group
is 50 MS/s, 5 MS/s, 500 kS/s, 50 kS/s, 5 kS/s, 500 S/s, or 50 S/s, a measurement channel with 5
the next lower sample rate cannot be registered to the same display group. For example, if the
maximum sample rate among the channels registered to a display group is 500 kS/s, a channel
with the sample rate set to 200 kS/s (the next lower sample rate) cannot be registered to the
same group. 6
Scale
You can set the display range. If linear scaling is set on the channel, the range is
7
specified using a scaled value.
It is also possible to automatically set a scale based on the measured data.
Zone 8
You can set the position to display the waveform.
The display position is set in terms of a percentage of the screen.
This feature keeps waveforms from overlapping when displaying multiple waveforms on
a single screen. 9
The following example shows the case when the display zone of waveform A is set to
30% to 100% and that of waveform B is set to 0% to 70%.
A
100 10
70

B 30
0
11
Displays Other Than Waveforms

Current Value Display 12
The current measured value is displayed using a bar graph, digital display (numeric),
analog meter, or thermometer.
Current values are measured data that this software retrieves from the SL1000 at 100-ms
intervals (Free Run mode) or 1-s intervals (Triggered mode). App
Numeric Value Display
Displays the measured values at the cursor position, waveform parameter values
(measure value), and GO/NO-GO judgment result. Index
IM 720120-61E 1-27
1.6 Triggering
Trigger Mode
The trigger mode defines the method in which measured data is acquired when a trigger
occurs. The following three modes are available.
Single Mode
When a trigger occurs, the SL1000 acquires measured data once for the specified
measuring time. This mode is suitable for observing a single-shot signal.
Normal Mode
The SL1000 acquires measured data each time a trigger occurs. After acquiring data for
the specified number of times, the SL1000 stops the acquisition. If the acquisition count
is set to infinite, data acquisition continues until the measurement is stopped.
After acquiring the measured data as a result of trigger occurrence, the SL1000 does not
accept the next trigger until the internal processing of the data is completed.
Single (N) Mode

The SL1000 acquires measured data each time a trigger occurs. You can select whether
to acquire the data the specified number of times and stop or acquire data infinite times.
The SL1000 acquires measured data whenever a trigger occurs even if the internal
processing of data is not completed.
If the acquisition count is specified, the maximum number of acquisitions is 5000 or
the number of acquisitions determined by the number of channels, sample rate, and
measuring time, whichever is less.
Note
During synchronous operation, you cannot select Single (N) mode.
Normal mode
Trigger
Data acquisition Data transmission/recording Data acquisition Data transmission/recording

(Dead time) (Dead time)
Memory PC HDD Memory PC HDD

Waveform display Waveform display
Data acquisition and data transfer/recording are synchronous.
Single (N) mode
Trigger
Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition
Memory Memory Memory Memory
PC HDD PC HDD PC HDD

Waveform display* Waveform display* Waveform display*
Data transmission/recording Data transmission/recording Data transmission/recording
Data acquisition and data transfer/recording are asynchronous.

*: The software may not be able to display the acquired data, depending on the internal processing time
and trigger timing.
1-28 IM 720120-61E
1.6 Triggering
Trigger Class 1
The following two trigger classes are available.

Simple
A trigger is generated on a single trigger condition.
2
Combination
A trigger occurs when all or any of the multiple trigger conditions are met. Combination is
valid if the trigger sources are channels.
3
Trigger Source
The following three trigger sources are available.
Channel 4
Generates a trigger on an input signal or the external trigger signal. A trigger can be
generated on a combination of trigger sources consisting of multiple channels and
external trigger signal.
5
Line
Generates a trigger on the rising edge of the power signal that is being supplied to the
SL1000. Waveforms synchronized to the commercial power supply frequency (50 Hz or
60 Hz) can be observed. 6
Time
Generates a trigger at specified time intervals (1 min to 24 hours) from a specified time.
Specified date/time 7

Trigger generated Trigger generated Trigger generated
Specified time
8
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-29
1.6 Triggering
Trigger Pattern, Trigger Level, and Hysteresis

Trigger Pattern
Select (rising edge), (falling edge), (both rising and falling edges), H (high), L (low),
IN, OUT, IN (L), or OUT (L).
(Rising Edge), (Falling Edge), and (Both Rising and Falling Edges)
A trigger is generated when the trigger source level becomes greater than or equal to
the trigger level; less than or equal to the trigger level; or both.
Rising edge Falling edge
Trigger level
Trigger generated Trigger generated
H (High) and L (Low)

A trigger is generated when the trigger source level is greater than or equal to the
trigger level (H) or less than or equal to the trigger level (L).
IN/OUT
A certain level width (window) is set and a trigger is generated when the trigger source
level enters this level width (IN) or exits from this level width (OUT).
IN OUT Trigger generated
Trigger generated
Window width Window width
Trigger level Trigger level

Trigger generated
IN(L)/OUT(L)
A certain level width (window) is set and a trigger is generated when the trigger source
level is within this level width (IN (L)) or outside this level width (OUT (L)).
Trigger Level
Trigger level refers to the level that is used to determine the trigger pattern (rising/falling
edge of the signal) and the like.
Hysteresis
If there is insufficient trigger level width such as when noise is present in the trigger
source, the trigger point fluctuates each time a trigger is generated. This causes the
displayed waveforms to be unstable. To solve this problem, a specified margin (trigger
hysteresis) is added to the trigger level. You can set the trigger hysteresis to Low (small
hysteresis width), Middle (medium hysteresis width), or High (large hysteresis width). The
hysteresis width varies depending on the input module.
Hysteresis width
Trigger generated
1-30 IM 720120-61E
1.6 Triggering
Pre-trigger, Trigger Delay, and Hold Off 1

Trigger Point and Trigger Position

Trigger point refers to the point where a trigger is generated. Trigger position refers to the
position where measurement is started after a trigger is generated. Normally, the trigger
point and the trigger position are the same. However, if you set a trigger delay (explained 2
later), the trigger position will be after the trigger point by the delay amount.
Pre-trigger
The section before the trigger positions is called pre-trigger section. Waveforms before 3
the trigger position can be displayed by measuring the pre-trigger section.
Specify the pre-trigger section as a percentage of the measuring time. If measuring using
an external clock, specify the pre-trigger section as a percentage of the number of data
points.
4
Trigger Delay
Setting a trigger delay allows displaying of waveforms that are acquired a specified time
(delay) after the trigger is generated. The function is invalid if the trigger source is set to 5
Time or if the SL1000 is measuring using an external clock.
The selectable range of trigger delay is 0 to 10 s.
Trigger position 6
Delay
7
Pre-trigger
Measuring time
Trigger point
8
Hold Off
Hold off refers to the act of temporarily stopping the detection of the next trigger once a
trigger has been generated. This function is useful when observing a pulse train signal, 9
such as a PCM code, and you want to acquire the waveform in sync with the repeat
interval as shown below. The function is invalid if the trigger source is set to Time or if the
SL1000 is measuring using an external clock.
The selectable hold off range is 0 to 10 s. 10
If the trigger pattern is set to rising edge
Repetition period
Hold off time 11
Measuring time Measuring time
Trigger level

Input signal
12
Trigger Invalid trigger Trigger
Acquired waveform App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-31
1.6 Triggering
Recording of Measured Data in Triggered Mode

If measuring in Triggered Mode, the recording start and stop conditions of measured data
as explained in section 1.4 are invalid. Measured data is recorded to the specified hard
disk each time a trigger occurs after recording is started. When the measurement caused
by a specified trigger stops, recording also stops.
Manual Trigger
After starting the measurement, data can be acquired at any time by pressing the manual
trigger button.
This function is available only when the measuring mode is set to Triggered Mode.
1-32 IM 720120-61E
1.7 Analysis Function 1

Cursor Measurement
There are two types of cursors: horizontal cursors and vertical cursors. Two cursors are 2
displayed for each type of cursor. The measured values at the two cursor positions and
the difference between the cursors can be displayed.
You can move the cursor directly by dragging it or by using the left and right arrow keys
on the keyboard. If you are dragging the cursor, the cursor moves in steps of screen
3
dots.
If you are using the left and right arrow keys, the vertical cursor moves over the
measured data. The speed at which the cursor moves varies depending on the number 4
of measured data points displayed on the screen.
If the number of measured data points is greater than the number of dots on the
waveform screen, the cursor moves on all the measured data points that are displayed at
the dot before moving to the next dot. Therefore, the cursor will move slower. 5
If multiple waveforms with different sample rates are displayed on the same screen, the
cursor moves according to the sample rate of the cursor target waveform.
For waveforms with low sample rate
Cursor movement
For waveforms with high sample rate
Cursor movement
6

Cursor target 7
waveform Cursor target
waveform
Displays the same value as the

previous measured value because 8
there is not measured data
Waveform Parameter Measurements

If measuring in Triggered Mode, the following parameters can be measured automatically. 9
Voltage Axis Parameters
P-P: P-P value (Max–Min) [V] Under shoot: (Low–Min)/(High–Low)×100 [%]
(Peak to peak value)*
Max: Maximum voltage [V]
Over shoot:
High:
(Max–High)/(High–Low)×100 [%]
High voltage [V]
10
(Maximum)* Low: Low voltage [V]
Min: Minimum voltage [V] Amplitude: (High–Low) [V]
(Minimum)* Middle: (Max+Min)/2
1
RMS: RMS value
n
{(Σ(xi)2}1/2 [V] 11
1
Average: Average voltage n Σxi [V]
Standard deviation:
Σxi2 Σxi
{ n –( n )2}1/2 [V]
* The characters inside the parentheses are measurement item names used when displaying the measured values.
12
Max High
Over shoot
P-P
App
Under shoot
Low
Min
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-33
1.7 Analysis Function
Time Axis Parameters

Rise: Rise time [s] Avg Period: Average period within the measuring range [s]*
Fall: Fall time [s] +Width: Time width above the mesial value [s]
Freq: Frequency [Hz] 1/Period (Plus width)*
Period: Period [s] –Width: Time width below the mesial value [s]
(Minus width)*
Avg Freq: Average frequency within the
Duty: Duty cycle + Width/Period × 100[%]
measuring range [Hz]*
* The characters inside the parentheses are measurement
Period item names used when displaying the measured values.
+Width –Width
High (100%)
Distal line (90%)
Mesial line (50%)
Proximal line (10%)

Low (0%)
Rise Fall
Pulse count
For Pulse = 3
Distal line (90%)
Mesial line (50%)
Proximal line (10%)
Measuring
T1 range T2
Burst1, Burst2: Burst width [s]
Distal line (90%)
Mesial line (50%)

Proximal line (10%)
Burst2
Burst1
Measuring
T1 range T2
Other Parameters
Int1TY: The area under the positive amplitude
Int2TY: The area under the positive amplitude – the area under the negative
amplitude
Int1TY Int2TY
Total area for positive side only: S1 + S2 Total area for both positive and
negative sides: S1 + S3 – S2
S2 S1 S3
S1
S2
1-34 IM 720120-61E
1.8 Alarms 1

There are two types of alarms: channel alarm and system alarm.
Channel Alarm (for Free Run Mode) 2
An alarm is generated when the measured data meets a specified condition.
Source Channels
The alarm source can be set to any channel registered in a measuring group. You
3
can also specify multiple channels for the source and make the alarm go off when all
channels meet the condition (AND) or when any channel meets the condition (OR).
Alarm Patterns
There are 4 alarm patterns.
4
H: An alarm is generated when the measured value of the source channel is
greater than a specified level.
L: An alarm is generated when the measured value of the source channel is less 5
than a specified level.
IN(L): An alarm is generated when the measured value of the source channel is
within a specified range.
OUT(L): An alarm is generated when the measured value of the source channel is 6
outside a specified range.
IN(L) OUT(L)
Alarm level 1 Alarm level 1

7

Alarm level 2 Alarm level 2
Alarm occurrence
8
Alarm occurrence
Hysteresis
Like triggers, a certain width (hysteresis) can be set on the alarm level. You can select
the hysteresis from Low, Middle, and High. 9
System Alarm
When a system error occurs, the SL1000 transmits an alarm signal from the rear-panel
alarm terminal. You can set an alarm that combines multiple system alarms. 10
The following errors are detected.
HDD Full: An alarm is generated if the hard disk for recording the
measured data runs out.
Acq Memory Overrun: An alarm is generated if the memory buffer acquiring the
11
measured data overruns during auto recording.
Fan Stop: An alarm is generated if the cooling fan of the SL1000 stops.
Sync. Failure Detection: An alarm is generated when a synchronous connecting
12
cable is disconnected during synchronous operation.
System alarms are always sent to the PC. The Acquisition Software displays a message
that describes the system alarm details and also displays the details in the error
information area. App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-35
1.8 Alarms
Alarm Output
The terminal on the SL1000 rear panel can be used to transmit a TTL logic signal when
an alarm occurs. The SL1000 cannot transmit both the channel alarm and system alarm
simultaneously.
In the case of a channel alarm, the SL1000 can be configured so that the signal level
remains even when the alarm condition is cleared after an alarm occurrence (hold) or so
that the signal level is returned to the original level when the alarm condition is cleared
(nonhold).
In the case of a system alarm, the signal level remains even when the alarm condition is
cleared after an alarm occurrence (hold).
Alarms during synchronous operation are generated from the master SL1000 unit (whose
unit ID is zero).
Recording Start and Stop Conditions

An alarm occurrence can be used as a condition for starting or stopping the recording.
For details on recording, see section 1.4.
1-36 IM 720120-61E
1.9 GO/NO-GO Judgment (for Triggered Mode) 1

GO/NO-GO judgment is performed on whether a value obtained through automated
measurement of waveform parameters is within a specified range. It is also possible to 2
execute an action such as data recording or buzzer based on the judgment result.
This function is useful if you want to inspect signals and track down abnormal symptoms
on an electronic equipment production line .
This function is available only when the measuring mode is set to Triggered Mode. 3
Note
You cannot configure GO/NO-GO judgment during synchronous operation.
4
Criteria
Specify upper and lower limits for each parameter. The SL1000 judges whether the
waveform parameter is within or outside the specified range. You can also specify
5
multiple waveform parameters (up to 16) and perform judgment when all conditions are
met (AND) or when any condition is met (OR).
The judgment area can be set to all the measured data that have been acquired or the
6
measured data between cursors.
Judgment Action
The following action can be executed based on the GO/NO-GO judgment result. 7
Save Data
Records the measured data in binary format to the hard disk specified in the recording
settings. Data is stored to a destination or file specified in Recording Settings.
8
Buzzer
Sounds the buzzer on the SL1000.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-37
1.10 X-Y Display
You can view the correlation between two input signal levels by assigning the level of
a waveform to the X-axis (horizontal axis) and assigning the level of another waveform
to the Y-axis (vertical axis). X-Y waveforms are displayed in a different window from the
window that displays normal waveforms.
You can display up to four display groups of X-Y waveforms.
This feature is available on software version 2.10 and later.
X-Axis and Y-Axis

X-Axis
Any channel registered in a measuring group can be assigned to the X-axis.
Y-Axis
Channels whose sample rate is the same as that of the X-axis and that have their
waveform display set to ON in their display condition settings are assigned to the Y-axis.
Number of Data Points to Draw

You can set the number of data points to draw to 2K, 10K, or 100K.
In Triggered Mode
If the number of measured data points is less than the specified number of data points to
draw, the SL1000 uses all the measured data to draw the waveform.
If the number of measured data points is greater than the specified number of data points
to draw, the SL1000 draws the waveform by reducing the number of data points to the
specified number. This reduction is done by taking the midpoint of the maximum and
minimum values of multiple measured data points.
The cursor measurement values are displayed using the measured raw data that is
stored internally.
Note
• When displaying data measured in Triggered mode on the X-Y display, if the number
of measured data points is greater than the number of data points to draw, the SL1000
displays the waveform by taking the midpoint of maximum and minimum values of the
measured data points. When taking cursor measurements, the cursors may be displayed off
of the X-Y waveform because the cursors are displayed according to the measured data.
• If there are too many waveforms or too many data points drawn on the X-Y display, the
waveform display updating and waveform recording may slow down.
In Free Run Mode

If the number of measured data points is less than the specified number of data points to
draw, the SL1000 uses all the measured data to display the waveform.
If the number of measured data points is greater than the specified number of data points
to draw, the SL1000 displays as much of the most recent measured data as is specified
by the number of data points to draw.
Display Area
In Triggered Mode
You can select the range of the X-Y display from the following.
Main: The X-Y display shows the measured data of normal waveforms.
Zoom: The X-Y display shows the measured data of zoomed waveforms.
In Free Run Mode
The X-Y display shows the measured data of normal waveforms.
1-38 IM 720120-61E
1.11 Screen Description 1

Main Screen
Display group Menu bar Toolbar Waveform screen 2
Record state Remaining hard disk indicator Status bar

Information about the hard disk of your PC or
File information
8
the internal hard disk of the SL1000
Measurement state Recording buffer
I/O state
Information about the Hard Disk of Your PC or the Internal Hard Disk of the 9
SL1000
Displays information about the hard disk of your PC or the internal hard disk of the
SL1000.
10
You can switch the displayed hard disk using tabs.
File Information
Displays the file name, save time, data size, and the like of the measured data or
setup data that are saved. 11
Record State
The lamp is red while recording to the hard disk.
Remaining Hard Disk Indicator
Displays the remaining hard disk space as Mbyte. If the remaining space falls low, the
12
bar turns red.
Measurement State
Displays the current measurement state such as Measuring, Wait Trigger, and Stop. App
When the measuring time is greater than or equal to 1 s: Pre Trigger, Wait Trigger,
Post Trigger, and Stop
When the measuring time is less than 1 s: Wait Trigger, Measuring, and Stop
Recording Buffer Index
Displays a bar that indicates buffer usage. The closer the recording buffer usage gets
to overrunning the buffer, the longer the blue bar becomes. For example, this situation
occurs when recording cannot keep up with the measured data.
IM 720120-61E 1-39
1.10 Screen Description
I/O State
Over-Range
Turns red when an over-range occurs.
Double-click to display an over-range list screen showing a list of channels that over-
range is occurring on.
Trigger Signal State
The lamp is yellow if the trigger condition is met or if an external trigger signal is being
applied.
Alarm Output State
The lamp is red while an alarm is being output.
Displays the master output state during synchronous operation.
GO/NO-GO Judgment Output State
The GO lamp is green if GO is being output. The NO-GO lamp is red if NO-GO is
being output.
Waveform Screen
Adjusts the grid brightness
Measurement count
Active waveform Maximum sample rate Waveform display area
Zone Measuring Trigger
Scale Mode level Trigger position Numeric value display area
Displays Main/Zoom waveform Expansion rate

Turns ON/OFF the zone display
Turns ON/OFF the waveform display Changes the ratio of the
Adjusts the background brightness of waveform display area to
the waveform display area (highlighted display) for Free Run mode the numeric value display area
Active Waveform
The waveform with a triangle mark is the active waveform.
Scale
Displays the scale according to the display settings. If zones specified with overlapping
scales, the scale of the active waveform is displayed.
Measuring Mode
Displays “Free Run,” or the Trigger Mode’s “Normal,” “Single,” “Single (N).”
Maximum Sample Rate
Displays the measuring group 1 sample rate.
Adjusting the Trigger Position and Trigger Level
Drag the markers to set the trigger position and trigger level.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Grid (Graticule)
Drag the knob to change the brightness of the grid.
Adjusting the Background Brightness of the Waveform Display Area (Highlighted
Display)
Slide the knob to change the background of the waveform display from black to white
in steps
1-40 IM 720120-61E
Turn ON/OFF the Waveform Display 1

Click this area to turn ON/OFF the channel display. Channels that are displayed are

indicated in light blue.
Turning ON/OFF the Zone Display (Sliding Window)
Move the pointer over this area and click when this area changes to light purple to turn 2
ON/OFF the zone display area.
Main Waveform or Zoom Waveform
The displayed waveform is indicated by the blue frame. 3
Changing the Ratio of the Waveform Display Area to the Cursor Value Display Area
Drag when the pointer changes to a left-right arrow to change the ratio of the display
areas.
Time Display 4
In Free Run mode, the displayed time range is displayed along with the elapsed time.
X-Y Waveform Screen 5

Measuring mode X-Y display range
Number of data
X-axis channel points to draw Maximum sample rate
8
Y-axis scale X-axis scale
Scale 9
The scale that you set in the respective display conditions is displayed for the X-
and Y-axes. If multiple channels are registered to the Y-axis, the scale of the active
waveform is displayed.
10
Measuring Mode
Displays “Free Run,” or the Trigger Mode’s “Normal,” “Single,” or “Single (N).”
Maximum Sample Rate
Displays the X-axis channel's sample rate. 11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-41
Menu Bar

File Menu
A menu used to save and load setup files, to save and load waveform data, to save
measured data, to load image data, to transfer files, and so on.
Acquisition Menu
A menu used to enter connection & group settings, measurement settings, trigger
settings, recording settings, display settings, alarm settings, GO/NO-GO settings, and
measure settings as well as execute auto setup, manual trigger, measurement start/
stop, recording start/stop/divide, and display hold/resume.
View Menu
A menu used to list alarm history, to show and hide operating information, to set
waveform zooming, to set waveform zones, to configure measured value display, to
show and hide instantaneous values, to show and hide full-screen display, to show
and hide the toolbar, and to show and hide the status bar.
Window Menu
A menu used to set the waveform screen. This menu appears when the waveform
screen is displayed.
Environment Menu
A menu used to enter environment settings and communication settings, perform a
self-test, display the system information of the SL1000, enable the key lock on the
SL1000, initialize the SL1000, and calibrate the SL1000.
Utility Menu
A menu used to start the included Xviewer software (excluding models with the /XV0
option) and to start the File Utility.
Help Menu
A menu used to display help and software version.
Toolbar
Click the buttons on the toolbar to execute a certain operation or display a setup menu.
Alarm Settings button
Start Monitoring button GO/NO-GO Settings button
Stop Monitoring button Measure Settings button
Start Recording button Auto Setup Button
Divide Recording button Manual Trigger button
Stop Recording button File Transfer button
Display Hold button Mark button
Display Resume button Version display button
File button
Display Group button

Display Setting button
Recording Settings button
Trigger Settings button
Measurement Settings button
Connection & Group Settings button
1-42 IM 720120-61E
1.12 Other Functions 1

Redisplaying the Measured Data
The measured data recorded in the past can be displayed. 2
Xviewer that is included with this software is used to display the measured data (Xviewer
is not included with the /XV0 option).
For details on Xviewer, see the user’s manual.
3
Processing Waveform Data Files
The file utility function allows you to merge and divide waveform data files (.wdf
extension) that have been recorded using the SL1000 and to convert waveform data files
to CSV files. It also allows you to process files so that waveform display is accelerated 4
on Xviewer for smooth data analysis.
Saving the Setup File

The setup entered using this software can be saved. 5
You can also open a setup file saved in the past to change the software settings.
Transferring Files
You can transfer files between the SL1000 and a PC. You can collectively transfer data 6
that has been recorded in synchronous operation mode or transfer data one unit at a
time.
Marking Waveforms (Version 2.10 and later) 7

When taking measurements using the internal clock in Free Run mode, you can set
marks on the waveform.
Each mark can display up to 16 characters, and you can set up to 128 marks. You can
edit, delete, and change the color of the marks that you have already set. 8
You can display a list of all the marks that are set to the displayed waveform, and you
can display the waveform at the position of the mark that you specify from the list.
Additionally, if you record measured data that has marks set in it or save such data to
9
file, the mark information is also saved. You can also display the marks together with the
waveform in Xviewer.
However, you cannot save just the mark information as a text file.
10
Accumulating Waveforms (Version 2.10 and later)
You can accumulate waveforms on the screen, retaining the old waveforms. This is
useful when you want to observe fluctuations in the measured data.
You can display the trace of the waveform when you are using the X-Y display in Free 11
Run mode.
Taking Snapshots (Version 2.10 and later)

You can change the display color of the waveforms that you want to keep on the screen
12
and retain just those waveforms. This is useful when you want to compare waveforms.
Automatically Displaying Waveforms from Memory (Version 2.10 and later)

You can set the SL1000 to automatically display the measured data in the unit's
App
acquisition memory.
In Triggered mode, the SL1000 can also move the zoom area automatically to scroll the
zoomed waveform.
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-43
1.13 Basic Operation
This section explains the basic operation of this software.
Text Box
You can directly type a value or text. Click the box to show the text cursor or highlight an
existing value and type from your keyboard.
Text cursor
Option Button
You can select one of the option buttons.
Option button
Check Box
You can select multiple items from the available items. Clicking a selected check box
clears it.
Check box
Drop-Down List Box

Click by the box to display a list of available choices.
Drop-down list box
Selecting Lines
To select a line on a setup screen displayed in table format, click the beginning of the
line. To select all lines, click the upper left corner of the table. To select consecutive lines,
click the first line you want to select and press the last line while holding down the Shift
key.
Click here to select or deselect all lines

Selected lines
1-44 IM 720120-61E
1.13 Basic Operation
Collectively Selecting or Clearing the Check Boxes of the Selected Items 1

On a setup screen displayed in table format, you can collectively select or clear the

check boxes in a selected range.
Select multiple lines containing the check boxes you want to manipulate as described
earlier. 2
Click at the bottom of the check box items to collectively select or clear the check
boxes in the selected range.
Select or clear the check boxes collectively 3
Selected lines 4

5
Click here to collectively select or clear the check boxes
of the selected lines.
6
Setting the Value of the First Line in the Selected Range to the Other Lines in
the Selected Range
On a setup screen displayed in table format, you can set the values in the selected range
to the same value as the value of the first line in the selected range. 7
Select multiple lines containing the values you want to manipulate as described earlier.
Click at the bottom of the items. The values in the selected range are set to the value of
the first line in the selected range.
8
Set to the same value as the first line
in the selected range
9
Selected lines

10
Click here to set the values in the selected

range to the same value as the first line in
11
the selected range
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 1-45
Chapter 2 Installation Procedure
2.1 Recommended PC System 1
Install this software on a PC with the following specifications.

2
Operating system
Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 8.1
Installation Procedure
CPU
Pentium 4, 1 GHz or better
3
Memory
At least 1 GB
4
Hard Disk
At least 500 MB of free space (at least 40 GB recommended when using the auto
recording function)
5
Communication Interface
USB2.0
Ethernet 1000BASE-T (if the /C10 option is installed in the SL1000)
6
CD-ROM Drive
A CD-ROM drive is required to install this software program.
CRT and Mouse

Display: XGA or better
7
Color: 65536 colors or better
The mouse must be compatible with Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 8.1.
8
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 2-1
2.2 Installing or Uninstalling the Acquisition
Software
Installing the Acquisition Software
1. Start Windows and log on with administrator privileges.
2. Load the Acquisition Software installation disk into the CD-ROM drive. The
installer automatically starts and the setup starts.
3. A screen appears for you to select the software you want to install. Select the
SL1000 Acquisition Software check box.
If you also want to install Xviewer, select the Xviewer check box.
4. Click Next according to the instructions on the screen.
5. A screen for setting the installation destination is displayed. The default setting
is C:\Program Files\Yokogawa\SL1000. To change the destination, click Change
and select the desired directory. Check the installation destination and click Next.
6. A screen prompting you to start the installation is displayed. If there is no problem

with the installation settings, click Install. You can change the installation settings
by clicking Back to return to the previous screens. Click Cancel to cancel the
installation.
2-2 IM 720120-61E
2.2 Installing or Uninstalling the Acquisition Software
7. The software installation starts. If the software installation completes successfully, 1

the following screen will be displayed.
Click Finish to finish the installation.
3

You are finished with the installation if you are using a model with the /XV0 option, 5
which does not contain Xviewer. Yokogawa > SL1000 is added to the Start >
Programs menu of Windows, and a shortcut icon is created on the desktop.
If Xviewer is included in your package, a message appears asking if you want to 6

install Xviewer. To install the program, click OK. The Xviewer installer starts. For
the procedure to install Xviewer, see the Xviewer User’s Manual.
Note 7
• You need a license number to install Xviewer. The license number is indicated on the CD
case.
• When you install the SL1000 Acquisition Software, the SL1000 File Utility is also installed.
Likewise, when you uninstall the SL1000 Acquisition Software, the SL1000 File Utility is also 8
uninstalled.
Uninstalling the Acquisition Software

9
1. On the task bar, click the Start button and choose Control Panel.
2. Double-click Add or Remove Programs from the Control Panel.
3. Select SL1000 in the Add or Remove Programs window and click Remove.
10
4. A confirmation dialog box for removing the program opens. Click Yes to delete the
program. Clicking No will cancel the removal operation.
5. The software program is uninstalled.
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 2-3
2.3 Installing the USB Driver
A dedicated USB driver (YKMUSB) or IVI driver (VISA) is necessary to connect the
SL1000 to your PC using the USB.
Install the dedicated USB driver (YKMUSB) according to the following procedure.
1. Connect the SL1000 to your PC using a USB cable.

The installation wizard for the USB driver starts (only when the SL1000 is
connected to the PC for the first time).
Note
• To connect a different SL1000 to the PC, you must install a new USB driver.
• Refer to the following manual in the installation CD.
\YKMUSB\IMB9852UT-01_030E.pdf
• The USB driver is included in "YKMUSB" folder.
2. Select “No, not this time” for the connection to Windows Update and click Next.
3. Select “Install from a list or specific location” and click Next.
2-4 IM 720120-61E
4. Select “Don’t search. I will choose the driver to install” for the installation options 1
and click Next. A screen for selecting the device driver to be installed is displayed.
3

5
5. Click Have Disk.
6. Click Browse. A screen for specifying the device driver to be installed is

displayed. 8
10

11
12
7. In the usbdriver folder in the installation folder of the Acquisition Software, select
the ykmusb.inf file and click OK.
App

Index
IM 720120-61E 2-5
8. Check that the path you specified in step 7 is displayed under Copy manufacture’s
files from, and click OK.
9. Click Next. The installation starts. When the installation is complete, the wizard
completion screen is displayed.
10. Click Finish.
2-6 IM 720120-61E
2.4 Starting and Exiting the Acquisition Software 1
Starting the Software

Double-click the SL1000 icon on the desktop. 2
The Acquisition Software starts.
Start-up Operation
If the Acquisition Software is started for the first time or in the normal case, a dialog box 3
asking whether you want to start the setting wizard opens.
5
To always start the setting wizard, select the Show Setting Wizard at startup check box.
You can start the software using the setup file that was saved previously by setting the
start-up options in the environment settings (see section 9.2). In some cases, the settings
cannot be updated using the same conditions such as when the module configuration 6
has been changed from the previous time. In such case, the message shown below is
displayed, and you can select what to do next.
This also applies when you manually load the settings from a setup file saved previously
to update the software and SL1000 settings. 7
Message Screen Example
Message 8

Corrective action
Messages and Their Descriptions 9

The messages that may appear at start-up are described below.
Message Description
Cannot find units. SL1000s cannot be detected using the search conditions used
the last time the software was exited or the search conditions of
the setup file. Below are some possible reasons.
10
• The communication connector is disconnected.
• If the connection method is Ethernet, the specified TCP/IP
address and the TCP/IP address of the SL1000 are different.
• The group ID of the SL1000 has been changed. 11
Connected unit is remotely The SL1000 is being controlled from another PC. This software
controlled by other applications. cannot make the connection.
Please connect it after ending the
application remotely controlled.
Configuration of the system are The connection and group settings that existed when the 12
different. software was exited the last time or those of the setup file are
different from those of the connected SL1000.
If you change, add, or remove the modules installed in the
SL1000, the software considers the connection and group
settings to be different. App
However, if you add a module to an empty slot to the right of the
right most slot in which a module is installed, the software does
not consider the connection and group settings to be different.
The software also does not consider the connection and
group settings to be different if only the channels registered in Index
measuring groups have changed.
On measuring Units are found. The connected SL1000 is measuring.
On recording Units are found. The connected SL1000 is recording.
IM 720120-61E 2-7
2.4 Starting and Exiting the Acquisition Software
Message Description
Current Firm Version is not The SL1000 unit firmware version is not supported by this
supported, you will not be able to software. Update the SL1000 unit to the latest version. (See the
connect. software and SL1000 unit firmware version compatibility table.)
• Software and SL1000 unit firmware version compatibility table

Software version of
SL1000 unit firmware version
this software
1.01 to 1.08 1.01 or later but earlier than 1.09
1.09 1.09 or later but earlier than 2.00
2.30 2.30 or later
Downloading the latest version:

http://tmi.yokogawa.com/products/data-acquisition-equipment/high-speed-data-
acquisition/sl1000-high-speed-data-acquisition-unit/
Corrective Action
The corrective action that is displayed along with the message is described below.
Corrective Action Description
Go system wizard. (Display the The software loads only the settings without connecting to
previous settings in offline.) the SL1000 and displays the Connection & Group Settings
screen. You can change the settings such as the measurement
conditions offline. Search SL1000s on the Connection &
Group Settings screen. If an SL1000 is found, the settings on
the SL1000 is updated with the settings you specified offline.
However, connection is not possible if the connection and group
settings of the detected SL1000 and those specified offline are
different.
If the detected SL1000 is measuring or recording, the message
“On measuring (recording) Units are found” is displayed. Select
Get settings from the SL1000 or Stop measuring and send
settings to the SL1000.
Get settings from the unit. Discard the channel assignments to measuring groups or
individual channel settings that were loaded and receive the
channel assignments to measuring groups or individual channel
settings from the SL1000. The measurement or recording on the
SL1000 continues.
Stop measuring and send If the SL1000 is measuring, the settings cannot be updated.
settings to the unit. Therefore, stop the measurement and update the SL1000
settings using the settings of this software.
Stop recording and send settings If the SL1000 is recording, the settings cannot be updated.
to the unit. Therefore, stop the recording and update the SL1000 settings
using the settings of this software.
If Start Monitoring or Start Recording is specified in the start-up options in the

environment settings, measurement or recording is started after you carry out the start-
up operation.
Exiting the Software
On the File menu, choose Exit. The setup data is automatically saved.
Operation When the Software Exits
The measurement is stopped when the software is exited or the measurement continues
even after the software is exited according to the exit options in the environment
settings.
2-8 IM 720120-61E
Chapter 3 Connecting to the SL1000
3.1 Connecting Using the USB 1
Connect the SL1000 to your PC using a USB cable.

If you are connecting the SL1000 to your PC for the first time after purchase, you must 2
install the USB driver. Install the USB driver according to the procedures given in section
2.3, “Installing the USB Driver.”
1. Click the Connection & Group Settings button or choose Connection & Group 3
Settings from the Acquisition menu.
Connecting to the SL1000

Display the Acquisition menu
Connection & Group Settings button 4

5
2. Set the connection method to USB.
3. Specify the group ID of the SL1000 to be connected and click the Search button.
The software searches for the specified SL1000 and makes a connection. The
channel configuration of the connected SL1000 is displayed. 6
The group ID is a group identification number that can be assigned to each SL1000. For
details, see IM720120-01E.
Unit’s Name 7
Select USB Specify the group ID to
search using the group ID
8
Execute the search
Displays the found 9

SL1000s
10
11
Move to the Measurement
Settings screen
Cancel the settings and
close the screen
12
Channel configuration of Apply the settings and close the screen
the connected SL1000s
App
Note
If the channel configuration of the SL1000 is not displayed, the connection may have failed.
Check the USB cable connection and perform the search again.
Index
IM 720120-61E 3-1
3.2 Specifying Communication Settings (When
Using the Optional Ethernet Interface)
If you are connecting to the SL1000 using the Ethernet interface, you must specify the
communication settings of the SL1000.
These settings are not necessary if you are connecting the SL1000 using the USB or if
you are connecting the SL1000 using the Ethernet interface with the default settings (with
DHCP turned ON).
The settings are specified over a USB connection.
Connecting the SL1000 to Your PC

Connect the SL1000 to your PC using a USB cable.
If you are connecting the SL1000 to your PC for the first time after installing this software,
you must install the USB driver. Install the USB driver according to the procedures given
in section 2.3, “Installing the USB Driver.”
Specifying the Communication Settings Using This Software

After starting this software, choose Communication Settings from the Environment
menu. The Communication Settings screen appears.
If the PC is already connected to the SL1000, disconnect it first.
Select the group ID and the unit ID of the SL1000 that

you want to specify communication settings for
Settings not necessary (see section 9.8)
Turn DHCP ON or OFF

You are done with the settings if you turn DHCP ON.
Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

(when DHCP is OFF)
Cannot be set
Settings not necessary (see section 8.3)
IP Address
If the DHCP server function is turned ON, you do not need to set the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway.
If the DHCP server function is turned OFF, set the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway according to the target network.
If the DHCP server function is turned ON in a network that allows a DHCP server to be
used, the IP address and other parameters are automatically assigned when the SL1000
is connected to the network.
3-2 IM 720120-61E
3.2 Specifying Communication Settings (When Using the Optional Ethernet Interface)
FTP Account 1
If you are accessing the hard disk of the SL1000 using FTP, set the user name,
password, and timeout value for using FTP.
Set the user name using up to 15 alphanumeric characters. The default setting is
“anonymous.” 2
Set the password using up to 15 alphanumeric characters. If the user name is
anonymous, the password is meaningless. The default setting is “” (null).
The selectable range of timeout is 0 to 3600 s.
3
Note

You cannot specify communication settings if the SL1000 is connected to the PC via the
Ethernet interface. Connect the SL1000 to your PC via USB.
4
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 3-3
3.3. Connecting Using the Ethernet Interface
(Option)
1. Click the Connection & Group Settings button or choose Connection & Group
Settings from the Acquisition menu.

Connection & Group Settings button

2. Set the connection method to Ethernet.

3. Specify the group ID or IP address of the SL1000 to be connected and click the
Search button. The software searches for the specified SL1000 and makes a
connection. The channel configuration of the connected SL1000 is displayed.
The group ID is a group identification number that can be assigned to each SL1000. For
details, see IM720120-01E.
Select this option button to

search without specifying
Select Ethernet Specify the group ID to an IP address
search using the group ID
Select this option button to
search by specifying an IP
address
Execute the search
Displays the found SL1000s
Move to the Measurement

Settings screen
Cancel the settings and
close the screen
Channel configuration of
Apply the settings and close the screen
the connected SL1000s
Note
• If the channel configuration of the SL1000 is not displayed, the connection may have failed.
Check the Ethernet cable connection and perform the search again.
• If you are connecting to the SL1000 using the Ethernet interface, you must set the IP
address and other parameters of the SL1000 in advance. For details, see section 3.2.
3-4 IM 720120-61E
3.4 Configuring the System 1
System Configuration for Independent Operation

1. Connect to the SL1000 according to the procedures given in section 3.1 or 3.3.
2
2. Register measuring channels in unit of modules to measuring groups. There are
four measuring groups (1 to 4).
Because the sample rate is set in unit of measuring groups, register modules that 3
will measure at the same sample rate to the same measuring group.

The data measured on the measuring channels that are registered here can be
acquired on the SL1000.
4
Drag this item (SL1000) to the
Measuring Groups area to
collectively register the Add button
modules in the SL1000 Add the selected module to a measuring group
5
7
Measuring Group tab
Measuring Group area

Shows the modules (to be measured)
that are registered to a measuring group 8
Delete button
Delete the selected modules in the
measuring group
9
Move to the Measurement Settings screen
Cancel the settings and close the screen
Modules that are not

registered to a
Clear button
Delete all modules registered
Apply the settings and close the screen 10
measuring group (not in the measuring group
to be measured)
Registration 11
Select a module you want to register from the unregistered modules on the left side of
the screen and click the Add button or drag the module to the Measuring Groups area.
The measured data on the modules registered to measuring groups is measured,
recorded, and displayed. 12
Note
• The sample rate of measuring group 1 can be set higher than the sample rate of other
measuring groups. We recommend that you register the modules that are to measure at a
App
high sample rate to measuring group 1.
• Register at least one master module to measuring group 1.
Deleting Channels Index

To delete a measuring channel, select a module in the measuring group area and click
the Delete button or drag the module to the Channel Information area.
Click the Clear button to delete all the measurement modules in the Measuring Groups
area.
IM 720120-61E 3-5
3.4 Configuring the System
System Configuration for Synchronous Operation

You can link up to eight SL1000s and perform synchronous measurement. For
instructions on how to connect the SL1000s for synchronous operation, see the SL1000
Acquisition Unit User’s Manual IM720120-01E. Connect the SL1000s for synchronous
operation before starting system configuration.
1. Connect to the SL1000 according to the procedures given in section 3.1 or 3.3.
2. Register measuring channels in unit of modules to measuring groups. There are
four measuring groups (1 to 4). Register at least one master module to measuring
group 1.
Because the sample rate is set in unit of measuring groups, register modules that
will measure at the same sample rate to the same measuring group.
The data measured on the measuring channels that are registered here can be
acquired on the SL1000.
Indication when the SL1000s
are connected for synchronous Add button
operation Add the selected unit or module to a measuring group
Measuring Group tab

Measuring Group area
Shows the units and modules that a
re registered to the measuring group
(these will be measured)
Delete button
Delete the selected units and modules in the
measuring group

Units and modules Clear button Apply the settings and close the screen
that are not registered Delete all modules Synchronize all linked units’ clocks to the master clock
to a measuring group registered in the
(not to be measured) measuring group
Configuration of linked units and module
All units displayed under Channel Information, including units whose
modules are not registered in any measuring group, are operated in sync.
Registration
Select a module you want to register from the unregistered modules on the left side of
the screen and click the Add button or drag the module to the Measuring Groups area.
The measured data on the modules registered to measuring groups is measured,
recorded, and displayed.
Note
• The sample rate of measuring group 1 can be set higher than the sample rate of other
measuring groups. We recommend that you register the modules that are to measure at a
high sample rate to measuring group 1.
• Register at least one master module to measuring group 1.
3-6 IM 720120-61E
3.4 Configuring the System
Clearing Synchronous Operation 1

To clear synchronous operation and switch to independent operation, turn off all slave
units (all SL1000s except the one with unit ID zero), and reconnect only the master
unit according to the procedure described in “System Configuration for Independent
Operation” on page 3-5. 2
Note
• Start and stop synchronous operation on the master unit.
• If you want to use synchronous operation after you turn off the SL1000s, you must 3
reconfigure the system. If you do not want to reconfigure the system, select the Previous

Settings check box under Start-up Options in Environment Settings (see section 9.3 for
details).
4
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 3-7
Chapter 4 Specifying Measurement Settings
4.1 Setting the Measuring Mode and Acquisition 1

Mode
1. Click the Measurement Settings button or choose Measurement Settings on
the Acquisition menu. 2

3
Set the measuring mode

To measure in Triggered mode, see section 4.8.
Set the measuring time (Triggered mode) Set the acquisition mode
4
Specifying Measurement Settings

5

6
Set to internal clock To use the channel alarm
To use an external clock, in Free Run mode,
see section 4.7. see section 4.9.
7
Setting the Measuring Mode
Select Free Run or Triggered.
Free Run: Acquires data at the same time measurement is started and
continues to acquire data until the measurement is stopped.
8
Triggered: Acquires data when a trigger occurs after starting the measurement.
To measure in Triggered Mode, see section 4.8.
In Triggered Mode, set the mode (Normal, Single, or Single (N)), the measuring time,
9
and the trigger count. The selectable range is determined by the number of measuring
channels and sample rate.
Setting the Acquisition Mode 10

Select Normal, Envelope, or Box Average.
For a detailed explanation of each mode, see section 1.3.
Normal Mode
Sampled data is stored in the acquisition memory without special processing. 11
Envelope Mode
The maximum and minimum values are determined every data acquisition interval, which
is based on the specified sample rate, from the data sampled at 100 MS/s. The maximum
and minimum values are acquired and an envelope waveform is displayed. 12
Box Average Mode
Acquires values that have been moving averaged at the data acquisition interval, which
is based on the specified sample rate, from the data sampled at 100 MS/s. This mode is App
available on the 701250, 701255, 720210, and 720211 modules.
Setting the Clock Source

Select Internal or External.
Index
If you are using an external clock, see section 4.7.
IM 720120-61E 4-1
4.2 Measuring the Voltage and Current
Set the measurement conditions for measuring voltage using the voltage measurement
module (701250, 701251, 701255, 701267, 701261, 701262, 701265, 701275, 720210,
or 720211).
the Acquisition menu.

Measuring Group tab

Set the sample rate and sample interval
Set the measuring range
The selectable ranges vary depending
on the probe attenuation setting
Set the bandwidth limit
Detail setting
Turning ON/OFF scaling
Scroll bar
Move to the Connection & Group Settings

screen (see chapter 3)
Move to the Recording Settings screen
(see chapter 5)
Copy and paste settings in unit of lines
Set the probe attenuation
Set the input coupling
Set the label
Measuring channels
Turn recording ON/OFF
Linear scaling by
specifying two points
Linear scaling by specifying

slope a and offset b of
equation y = ax + b

Scroll bar
Set the unit Set P1X to the measured Set P2X to the measured value
(when scaling is ON) value when the button is clicked when the button is clicked
4-2 IM 720120-61E
Measuring Group Tab 1

Select the measuring group for which to set the measurement conditions.
Setting the Sample Rate and Sample Interval

Set the sample rate or sample interval for each measuring group. Setting the sample rate 2
automatically sets the corresponding sample interval and vice versa.
The sample rate or sample interval can be determined from the following equation.
Sample rate = 1/sample interval
You can select the sample rate (sample interval) from 100 MS/s (10 ns), 50 MS/s (20 ns), 3
20 MS/s (50 ns), 10 MS/s (100 ns), 5 MS/s (200 ns), 2 MS/s (500 ns), 1 MS/s (1 μs),
500 kS/s (2 μs), 200 kS/s (5 μs), 100 kS/s (10 μs), 50 kS/s (20 μs), 20 kS/s (50 μs),
10 kS/s (100 μs), 5 kS/s (200 μs), 2 kS/s (500 μs), 1 kS/s (1 ms), 500 S/s (2 ms),
200 S/s (5 ms), 100 S/s (10 ms), 50 S/s (20 ms), 20 S/s (50 ms), 10 S/s (100 ms), and 4
5 S/s (200 ms).

Note
• If the sample rate of measuring group 1 is set to 50 MS/s, 5 MS/s, 500 kS/s, 50 kS/s, 5 kS/s, 5
500 S/s, or 50 S/s, the sample rate of other groups cannot be set to the next lower sample
rate. For example, if the sample rate of measuring group 1 is set to 500 kS/s, the sample
rate of other measuring groups cannot be set to 200 kS/s (the next lower sample rate).
• Set the sample rate of measuring group 1 higher than the sample rate of other measuring 6
groups.
• If measuring in Triggered Mode, the selectable range of measuring time varies depending
on the sample rate of measuring group 1 and the number of registered channels. For
details, see section 4.8. 7
• When you confirm a new sample rate (by clicking OK, Next, or Back) in Free Run mode, the
previous measured data in the memory and the waveform display are cleared.
Maximum Sample Rate of Each Module 8

If the sample rate is set higher than the maximum sample rate of a module, data is
updated only at the maximum sample rate of the module. Consequently, all of the data
within the data update interval of the module are the same data. The maximum sample
rate of each module is as follows: 9
Module When Using When Using
Internal Clock External Clock
701250/701255 10 MS/s 1 MS/s
701251
701267/701270/701271/701275
1 MS/s
100 kS/s
1 MS/s
100 kS/s
10
701261/701262 (when measuring voltage) 100 kS/s 100 kS/s
701261/701262 (when measuring temperature) 500 S/s 500 S/s
701281 1 MS/s 1 MS/s
701265 500 S/s 500 S/s 11
720210/720211 100 MS/s 5 MS/s
Rec (Turn Recording ON/OFF)

To record the measured data on a registered channel, select the check box. 12
Measuring channel
Displays the registered measuring channel numbers.
App
Label (Name of the Measuring Channel)
You can assign names to measuring channels. Click the Label box of the measuring
channel you want to name to display the text cursor or to highlight the existing name.
Then, type the name. You can specify up to eight characters for the name. By default, the Index
channel number of the slot is assigned for the name.
The channel names specified here are used in setting the waveform display conditions
and on the waveform screen.
IM 720120-61E 4-3
Setting the Coupling/Mode

Select how the input signal is coupled to the vertical control circuit from the list below.
AC: Acquires only the AC component of the input signal.
DC: Acquires all the components (DC and AC) of the input signal.
GND: Checks the ground level.
To measure rms values using the 701267, select AC-RMS or DC-RMS. For details on
rms measurement, AC-RMS, and DC-RMS, see page 1-12.
For the 701265, select DC or GND.
Input Coupling Settings and Frequency Characteristics

The frequency characteristics when AC or DC is specified are shown below.
Note that low-frequency signals and signal components are not acquired if AC is
selected as indicated in the figure below.
If AC is selected If DC is selected
Attenuation Attenuation
0 dB 0 dB
–3 dB –3 dB

Input frequency –3 dB point* Input frequency –3 dB point*
The lower frequency –3 dB point when using AC coupling*

* The value varies for each input module. For details, see the SL1000 Input
Module User’s Manual (IM 720120-51E).
Setting the Probe (Probe Attenuation)

Select the probe attenuation from the following according to the type of probe that you
are using.
1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1, 1A:1V, 10A:1V, 100A:1V
1:1 to 1000:1 represent the probe attenuations for voltage probes.
1A:1V, 10A:1V, and 100A:1V represent the output voltage rates of current probes.
The probe attenuation is fixed to 1:1 on the 701261, 701262, and 701265.
Note
If the probe type is not set correctly, the voltage and scale values of the input signals will not be
displayed correctly. For example, if you set the attenuation to 1:1 when you are actually using a
10:1 probe, the displayed value for the waveform amplitude will be 1/10th the actual value.
Range (Setting the Measuring Range)

Set the measuring range according to the signal applied to the module. The measuring
range varies depending on the module and probe attenuation setting. The measuring
ranges when the probe attenuation is 1:1 are as follows:
Input Module Measuring Range
701250(HS10M12) 50mV to 200V
701251(HS1M16) 10mV to 200V
701255(NONISO_10M12) 50mV to 200V
701267 (HV (with RMS)) 200 mV to 2 kV
701261 (UNIVERSAL) 50 mV to 200 V
701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)) 50 mV to 200 V
701265 (TEMP/HPV) 1 mV to 100 V
701275 (ACCL/VOLT) 50 mV to 100 V
720210 (HS100M12)/720211 (HS100M12) 100 mV to 200 V
4-4 IM 720120-61E
Setting the Bandwidth Limit 1

High frequency components can be eliminated from the input signal. The bandwidth
varies depending on the input module as follows:
Input Module Bandwidth Limit
701250 (HS10M12)/ 500 Hz, 5 kHz, 50 kHz, 500 kHz, and Full 2
701255 (NONISO_10M12)
701251 (HS1M16) 400 Hz, 4 kHz, 40 kHz, and Full
701267 (HV (with RMS)) 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, and Full
701261 (UNIVERSAL) 40 Hz, 400 Hz, 4 kHz, Auto (other than 701261), and Full
3
701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF))
701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
701265 (TEMP/HPV) Full
720210 (HS100M12)/ 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 40 kHz, 80 kHz, 160 kHz, 640 kHz,
4
720211 (HS100M12) 1.28 MHz, 2 MHz, and Full

The 2 Hz, 8 Hz, and 30 Hz settings on the 701261, 701262, and 701265 are specified for
temperature measurements.
5
For example, frequency bandwidth limits of 400 Hz, 4 kHz, and 40 kHz are available on
the 701251 (HS1M16). The frequency characteristics when the bandwidth is limited are
shown below. If Full is selected, the maximum bandwidth of the input module is used.
6
–3 dB
7
Approx. 400 Hz Approx. 4 kHz Approx. 40 kHz FULL
Bandwidth Limit on the 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)) and 701275 (ACCL/VOLT) 8

If voltage is being measured on the 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)) or if you set the
bandwidth limit on the 701275 (ACCL/VOLT) to Auto, the anti-aliasing filter and low-pass
filter settings are set to values shown below according to the sample rate.
Sample Rate Anti-Aliasing Filter Low-Pass Filter
9
200 kS/s or higher 40 kHz OFF
100 kS/s 40 kHz OFF
50 kS/s 20 kHz OFF
20 kS/s 8 kHz OFF 10
10 kS/s 4 kHz 4 kHz
5 kS/s 2 kHz 4 kHz
2 kS/s 800 Hz 4 kHz
1 kS/s 400 Hz 400 Hz 11
500 S/s 200 Hz 400 Hz
200 S/s 80 Hz 400 Hz
100 S/s 40 Hz 40 Hz
50 S/s 20 Hz 40 Hz 12
5 S/s to 20 S/s 20 Hz 40 Hz
2 S/s or lower 20 Hz 40 Hz
Ext sample 40 k Hz OFF
App
For example, for sample rates between 100 kS/s to 50 kS/s, the cutoff frequency of the
anti-aliasing filter is set to 40% of the sample rate.
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-5
Detail Setting
Specify detailed settings for each channel.
Click the Detail Setting box of a desired channel to open the detail setting screen.
701250, 701251, 701255, 701267, 720210, and 720211


Waveform inversion

Change the channel to be set
701261, 701262, and 701265

(Set to DC or GND)

Waveform inversion

701275
(Set to DC, AC, or GND)


Waveform inversion

For details on the input coupling, probe attenuation, bandwidth limit, and measuring
range, see the items described earlier.
Wave Invert
Inverts the waveform around zero.
Cursor measurements, automated measurement of waveform parameters, and
computation are performed on the inverted waveform.
Note
The trigger function is executed on the original waveform even if the waveform is inverted.
4-6 IM 720120-61E
Setting the Scaling (Linear Scaling) 1

Select the check box to enable linear scaling.
Acquires the measured data by linear scaling the data.
There are two linear scaling methods. One method is to set the the measured values of
any two points and their corresponding scaled values (P1-P2) and the other method is to 2
specify the scaling coefficient a and offset value b (aX+b).
Scale value (Y) Y = aX + b
P2Y
P2 3
P1Y P1
4
Measured value (X)
P1X P2X

Measuring range
Setting the Unit 5

A unit can be assigned to the linearly scaled values. Click the Unit box of the measuring
channel you want to set to display the text cursor or to highlight the existing unit. Then,
type the unit.
Set the unit using up to four characters.
6
P1-P2
Specify arbitrary scale values (P1Y and P2Y) for the measured values of two arbitrary
points (P1X and P2X). The scale conversion equation (y = ax + b) is derived from these 7
four values.
• Range of measured values (P1X and P2X): –9.99990E+25 to +9.99990E+25
• Range of scaled values (P1Y and P2Y): –9.99990E+25 to +9.99990E+25
8
However, you cannot set measured or scaled values P1 and P2 that would make
value a in the scaling equation zero or an incalculable value.
The aX+b setting changes along with the P1-P2 setting.
You can also directly assign the current measured value to P1X or P2X. 9
aX+b
The results obtained from the following computation based on the specified scaling
coefficient a and offset b are displayed as cursor measurement values and automated 10
measurement values of waveform parameters.
Y = aX + b (where X is the measured value and Y is the linear scaling result)
However, coefficient a cannot be set to zero.
The P1-P2 setting changes along with the aX+b setting. 11
Assigning a Measured Value to P1X or P2X
You can directly assign the current measured value to P1X or P2X to set the linear
scaling. 12
After selecting the channel you want to set, click P1X Measure or P2X Measure. The
measured value when you click the button is assigned to P1X or P2X. This feature is
convenient if you want to assign sensor output values to P1Y and P2Y so that measured
results will be scaled to sensor output values. App
You cannot execute this function while the SL1000 is measuring or recording.
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-7
4.3 Measuring the Temperature
Set the measurement conditions for measuring the temperature using the Universal
Module (701261 or 701262) or Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module
(701265).


Measuring Group tab Set the sample rate and sample interval
Set the thermocouple type
Detail setting
Scroll bar
Move to the Connection & Group Settings
(see chapter 5)

Set the input coupling(Set to TC)
Set the label
Measuring channels
Measuring Group, Sample Rate, and Sample Interval

The settings for the Measuring Groups tab, Sample Rate, and Sample Interval are the
same as described in section 4.2, “Measuring the Voltage and Current.” See page 4-2.

To record the measured data on a registered channel, select the check box.
Measuring channel

You can assign a name to measuring channels. Click the Label box of the measuring
Then, type the name. You can set up to eight characters for the name. By default, the
4-8 IM 720120-61E
Setting the Coupling/Mode 1

Set the coupling/mode to TC.
Setting the Range (Thermocouple Type)

Set the range according to the thermocouple that you are using. 2
Select the thermocouple from below.
If the input terminal is open, the displayed value is set to a value less than or equal to the
lower limit of the measuring range.
Type Measuring Range Type Measuring Range 3
K –200 to 1300°C R 0 to 1700°C
E –200 to 800°C S 0 to 1700°C
J –200 to 1100°C B 400 to 1800°C
T –200 to 400°C N 0 to 1300°C 4
L –200 to 900°C W 0 to 2300°C

U –200 to 400°C Au7Fe 0 to 280 K
Setting the Bandwidth Limit 5

High frequency components can be eliminated from the input signal. Select 2 Hz, 8 Hz,
30 Hz, or Full. For details, see section 4.2, “Measuring the Voltage and Current.”
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-9
Detail Setting

(Set to TC)
Set the thermocouple type
Sets the temperature unit

Set the RJC
Set the burnout

Unit
Select the temperature unit from °C and K. The default setting is °C.
RJC
The SL1000 normally performs reference junction compensation with the built-in
RJC circuit when measuring temperature with the thermocouple. When checking the
temperature measurement value, or when using an external reference junction (0°C), the
internal reference junction compensation needs to be disabled.
Select the check box to use the internal reference junction compensation.
In normal cases, use the internal reference junction compensation.
Note
If a voltage corresponding to a certain temperature t is applied at the input with the RJC
turned OFF and the measured temperature does not match temperature t, the SL1000 may be
damaged. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Burnout
This function is used to accurately detect a burnout in the thermocouple. If you select the
check box and the thermocouple measurement input detects a burn out, the measured
value is fixed to the upper limit of the measurement range of each thermocouple. By
default, this setting is turned OFF (do not detect burn outs).
Note
Linear scaling and inverted display are not available in temperature measurements.
4-10 IM 720120-61E
4.4 Measuring the Strain 1
Set the measurement conditions for measuring the strain on the Strain Module (701270
or 701271). 2
Display the Acquisition menu 3


4

Set the measuring range 5
Detail setting
6
Turning ON/OFF linear scaling
Scroll bar
7
Move to the Connection & Group
Settings screen (see chapter 3)
Move to the Recording Settings
screen (see chapter 5) 8
Set the label
9
Measuring channels
10
Set the unit (when scaling is ON)
two points
11
slope a and offset b of equation
y = ax + b
12
Scroll bar
App
Index
Set P1X to the measured Set P2X to the measured value
value when the button is clicked when the button is clicked
Execute strain balance
IM 720120-61E 4-11
4.4 Measuring the Strain


Measuring channel

Setting the Coupling/Mode

Set the range unit to “the strain unit (×10–6 strain): μSTR” or “the output unit of the strain
gauge transducer: mV/V.” The default value is μSTR. The following equation is used to
derive the mV/V range.
(mV/V) = 0.5×(μSTR)/1000
Range (Setting the Measuring Range)

Select from the following:
If μSTR Is Selected
500 μSTR, 1000 μSTR, 2000 μSTR, 5000 μSTR, 10000 μSTR, and 20000 μSTR
For details on the measuring range, see the separate user’s manual for the module.
If mV/V Is Selected
0.25 mV/V, 0.5 mV/V, 1 mV/V, 2.5 mV/V, 5 mV/V, and 10 mV/V
For details on the measuring range, see the SL1000 Input Module User’s Manual (IM
720120-51E).
Note
Be sure to execute balancing if you change the measuring range.
Setting the Bandwidth Limit

High frequency components can be eliminated from the input signal. Select 10 Hz, 100
Hz, 1 kHz, or Full. For details, see section 4.2, “Measuring the Voltage and Current.”
4-12 IM 720120-61E
Detail Setting 1
Set the range unit
2
Set the bridge voltage
Set the gauge factor
Execute strain balance
3
Set the shunt calibration (701271)
P1:X: Input value when the relay circuit is OFF
(setting normally not necessary)
P1:Y: Value corresponding to P1:X when the relay 4
circuit is OFF (normally 0)
P2:X: Input value when the relay circuit is ON

(shunt resistance, setting normally not necessary)
P2:Y: Strain value corresponding to the shunt resistance
when the relay circuit is ON
Change the channel to be set Execute shunt calibration 5

Selecting the Bridge Voltage 6

You can select the voltage to be applied to the bridge head.
2V: When the bridge head resistance (bridge resistance) is 120 Ω to 1000 Ω
5V:* When the bridge resistance is 350 Ω to 1000 Ω
10V:* When the bridge resistance is 350 Ω to 1000 Ω
7
* The bridge voltage can be set to 5 V or 10 V only if the following conditions are met.
• The bridge resistance is 350 Ω or greater.
• A strain gauge transducer that supports the bridge voltage of 5 V or 10 V.
8
The bridge voltage cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress.
Setting the Gauge Factor
You can set the gauge factor of the strain gauge.
Selectable range: 1.90 to 2.20 (the resolution is 0.01) 9
The gauge factor is a unique constant defined for the strain gauge. It is usually described
in the manual for the strain gauge. The gauge factor cannot be changed while data
acquisition is in progress.
Gauge Factor If mV/V Is Selected
10
This software allows you to set the gauge factor to any value. However, if there are no
specifications given on the strain gauge transducer, set the gauge factor to 2.00. If the
gauge factor is not 2.00, e is derived in the SL1000 using the following equation. 11
e = (4/K)×(V/E) e: Measured value of the strain gauge transducer [mV/V]
V: Voltage measured on the bridge [V]
E: Voltage applied to the bridge [V]
K: Gauge factor 12
Executing Strain Balancing
Balancing automatically compensates the unbalanced portion of the bridge resistance.
Balancing takes a few seconds.
Executable range of balancing: ±10000 μSTR (if set to μSTR)
App
±5 mV/V (if set to mV/V)
Note
Perform balancing by connecting a bridge box or strain gauge transducer and without applying
Index
a load to the strain gauge.
IM 720120-61E 4-13
Shunt Calibration (Only on the 701271(STRAIN_DSUB))

The 701271 Strain Module (STRAIN_DSUB) supports shunt calibration.
Shunt calibration is used to correct the gain of strain measurements by inserting a known
resistance (shunt calibration resistance (shunt resistance)) in parallel with the strain
gauge. It is a type of scaling. Strain Module 701271 (STRAIN_DSUB) has a built-in relay
circuit for shunt calibration.
To execute shunt calibration, a bridge head that supports shunt calibration
(701957/701958) is necessary.
• When correcting the gain on the negative side (normal) • When correcting the gain on the positive side (normal)
Shunt calibration relay circuit Shunt calibration relay circuit
(built into the strain module) (built into the strain module)
Turns ON/OFF automatically when Turns ON/OFF automatically when
shunt calibration is executed. Bridge+ shunt calibration is executed.
Bridge+
120 Ω 120 Ω
In+ In+
Bridge Bridge
In- voltage In-
120 Ω 120 Ω voltage
120 Ω 120 Ω
Bridge- Bridge-
Shunt resistor Shunt resistor,
(Implemented in the bridge head) when correcting the positive side
Note
• In a normal shunt calibration, set only P2:Y (P1:Y is 0).
• Scale the strain value using a shunt resistor. P1:X is the input value when a shunt resistor is
not connected. P1:Y is the strain value corresponding to P1:X. P2:X is the input value when
a shunt resistor is connected. P2:Y is the strain value corresponding to the shunt resistance.
The line connecting points P1 and P2 is used to perform scaling.
• When shunt calibration is executed, the relay circuit for shunt calibration built into the strain
module is turned ON/OFF to automatically set P1:X and P2:X to the input value when the
shunt resistor is connected and the input value when the shunt resistor is not connected,
respectively.
• If you change P1:X, P1:Y, P2:X, or P2:Y, the linear scaling setting is also changed.
• Executing Shunt Cal Exec changes P1:X and P2:X to the current input values.
In addition to the normal shunt calibration (when the shunt calibration relay circuit is ON),
the this software allows the setting of a zero point when the built-in relay circuit is OFF.
This function is effective when the strain value is not 0 after the execution of balancing.
P1:X: If shunt calibration is executed, the input value when the relay circuit is OFF is
applied.
P1:Y: Sets the value (usually 0) when the relay circuit is OFF.
P2:X: If shunt calibration is executed, the input value when the relay circuit is ON is
applied.
P2:Y: Sets the strain value corresponding to the shunt resistance when the relay
circuit is ON.
4-14 IM 720120-61E
• Shunt calibration
1
Strain After execution
The gain is corrected.
Current measured
Before execution
2
value*
P2:X Strain input

3
P2:Y
Set P2:Y of the setup menu to the
strain value corresponding to the
shunt resistor.
4
* Automatically obtained when shunt calibration is executed.

For details on shunt calibration, see the SL1000 Input Module User’s Manual (IM 720120-
51E). 5
Note
• If executing shunt calibration, select an appropriate range so that the measured values do
not exceed the range when the shunt calibration relay circuit is ON. The SL1000 attempts
shunt calibration within the current specified range.
6
• If shunt calibration fails (the measured value exceeds the range, for example), an error
message is displayed. If this happens, change the range and execute shunt calibration
again.
7
Setting the Scaling (Linear Scaling)
Acquires the measured data by linear scaling the data. 8
For details on linear scaling, see page 4-7.
Precautions to Be Taken When Making Strain Measurements

• Be sure to execute balancing when making strain measurements. 9
• Select a bridge voltage of 5 V or 10 V when the bridge resistance is greater than
or equal to 350 Ω. If a bridge voltage of 5 V or 10 V is applied when the bridge
resistance is less than 350 Ω, correct measurements will not be made.
• If using a strain gauge transducer, use a bridge voltage in the recommended
10
voltage range of the transducer.
• Correction cannot be executed if a strain gauge bridge (bridge head) or a strain
gauge transducer is not connected to the channel on which balancing is to be 11
executed.
• If balancing fails on any of the specified channels, an error message will be
displayed.
• If the SL1000 is turned ON, a new strain gauge is connected, or the measuring 12
range, bridge voltage, or gauge factor is changed, balancing must be performed
again before making further measurements.
• If you switch the unit, the unit of all related parameters of the channel is
switched accordingly (trigger level, measured values of automated measurement App
parameters, cursor measurement values, etc.).
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-15
4.5 Measuring the Acceleration
Set the measurement conditions for measuring the acceleration on the Acceleration
Module (701275).


Detail setting
Scroll bar

(see chapter 5)
Copy and paste settings in unit of lines Apply the settings and close the screen
Set the input coupling(Set to ACCL)
Set the label
Measuring channels


Measuring channel

4-16 IM 720120-61E
4.5 Measuring the Acceleration
Setting the Coupling/Mode 1

Set the coupling/mode to ACCL.
Setting the Range (Gain)

Set the gain in the range from ×0.1 to ×100. 2
High frequency components can be eliminated from the input signal. Select 40 Hz,
400 Hz, 4 kHz, Auto, or Full. For details, see section 4.2, “Measuring the Voltage and
3
Current.”
Detail Setting
4

(Set to ACCL)
5
Set the bias

Set the sensitivity 6
Set the unit
Change the channel to be set 7
Setting the Bias

If the bias is turned ON, a 4-mA bias current is supplied to the acceleration sensor. Do 8
not connect the acceleration sensor with the bias turned ON.
Setting the Sensitivity
Set the sensitivity of the acceleration sensor in the range of 0.10 mV/Unit to 2000.00 mV/
Unit. 9
Setting the Unit
Set the unit using up to four characters. The default setting is m/s2.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-17
4.6 Measuring the Frequency, Number of Rotations,
Period, Duty Cycle, Power Supply Frequency,
Pulse Width, Pulse Integration, and Velocity
Set the measurement conditions for measuring the frequency on the Frequency Module
(701281).


Detail setting
Turning ON/OFF linear scaling
Scroll bar

Move to the Recording Settings
Turn recording Copy and paste settings Apply the settings and close the screen
ON/OFF in unit of lines
Set the label
Measuring channels
Linear scaling by specifying two points
Linear scaling by specifying slope a and

offset b of equation y = ax + b
Scroll bar
Set P1X to the measured Set P2X to the measured value when the button is clicked
value when the button is clicked
Set the unit (when scaling is ON)
4-18 IM 720120-61E
4.6 Measuring the Frequency, Number of Rotations, Period, Duty Cycle, Power Supply Frequency, Pulse
Width, Pulse Integration, and Velocity
Settings Common to the Frequency, Number of Rotations, Period, Duty 1

Cycle, Power Supply Frequency, Pulse Width, Pulse Integration, and Velocity
Measurements
The settings for the Measuring Groups tab, Sample Rate, and Sample Interval are the 2

To record the measured data on a registered channel, select the check box. 3
Measuring channel
4

Then, type the name. You can set up to eight characters for the name. By default, the 5
6
Setting the Scaling (Linear Scaling)
Acquires the measured data by linear scaling the data.
For details on linear scaling, see page 4-7. 7
Note
The coupling, probe, range, and bandwidth limit of the frequency module can be set on the
detail setting screen.
8
Detail Setting
Click the Detail Setting box of a desired channel to open the detail setting screen. 9
Set the input conditions
10
Set the measurement conditions
11

Set the measurement conditions 12

(The setup items vary depending
on the measurement items)
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-19
4.6 M
easuring the Frequency, Number of Rotations, Period, Duty Cycle, Power Supply Frequency, Pulse
Set the input conditions
Select the preset

Set the input coupling (when the preset is user defined)
Set the probe (when the preset is Logic 5V (3V/12V/24V),
ZeroCross, or user defined)
Set the voltage range
(when the preset is ZeroCross or user defined)

Set the threshold level (when the preset is user defined)
Set the hysteresis
Set the slope (when the preset is Logic 5V (3V/12V/24V),
Pull-up 5V, or user defined)
Set the chattering elimination time
Set the pull-up (when the preset is Pull-up 5V)
Preset
Select from the following presets according to the sensor that you are using.
• Logic 5V: 5-V logic signal, 5-V output sensor, and sensor with TTL output
• Logic 3V: 3-V logic signal and 3-V output sensor
• Logic 12V: 12-V driven relay/sequence circuit and 12-V driven sensor
• Logic 24V: 24-V driven relay/sequence circuit and 24-V driven sensor
• Pull -up 5V: Open-collector output sensor and contact circuit
• ZeroCross: Sensor/Encoder that outputs positive and negative voltages and
sensor that outputs sine waves
• AC100V: When measuring a supply voltage of 100 VAC using the isolated
probe (700929)
• AC200V: When measuring a supply voltage of 200 VAC using the isolated
probe (700929)
• EM Pickup: Power-generating electromagnetic pickup
• User: Any sensor
Select a preset to automatically enter settings appropriate for the signal (Some items
need to be manually entered). If you select User, all the setup items can be set as
desired. For details on the settings of each preset, see the SL1000 Input Module
User’s Manual (IM 720120-51E).
• Logic 5V, Logic 3V, Logic 12V, and Logic 24V
Use this preset when the output from the sensor or the like changes in the range of
0 V to 5 V (or 3 V, 12 V, or 24 V: supply voltage applied to the sensor). The voltage
range is automatically set to the optimum voltage range, and the threshold level is
automatically set to one-half the voltage.
• Pull -up 5V
Use this preset when the sensor output is open collector or contact output. The
pull-up function is enabled only when this preset is selected. The pull-up voltage is
approximately 5 V, and the pull-up resistor is 10 kΩ. If pull-up is turned ON, set the
input voltage in the range of 0 V to 5 V. If the input voltage exceeds this range, the
protection circuit will be tripped and the pull-up resistor will be automatically cut off.
• ZeroCross
Use this preset when the input voltage changes around 0 V. The input coupling is
automatically set to AC, and the threshold level is automatically set to 0 V. When
setting the voltage range, be sure that the maximum amplitude does not exceed
the voltage range.
4-20 IM 720120-61E
• AC100V and AC200V 1

Use this preset when measuring the supply voltage of 100-V or 200-V power
supply systems. The probe type is automatically set to 10:1; the voltage range is
automatically set to a value suitable for the input voltage and probe factor; and the
coupling is automatically set to AC. Be sure to use the isolated probe (700929) 2
when measuring the power supply voltage.
• EM Pickup (Electromagnetic Pickup)
Use this preset when connecting the electromagnetic pickup directly. The voltage
range is automatically set to ±1 V, and the threshold level is automatically set to 0 V.
3
• User (User-Defined)
Use this preset if you want to set the input conditions freely. Pull-up cannot be
specified.
4
Note

• If measuring high voltage exceeding 42 V (AC+DCpeak) on the 701281 (FREQ), be sure to
use the isolated probe (700929).
• Use EM Pickup only when connecting the electromagnetic pickup. 5
• The SL1000 does not support electromagnetic pickups that require power supply or those
that require terminators at the output. For these types of electromagnetic pickup, furnish
appropriate measures at the sensor end.
• The output from the electromagnetic pickup must be within 42 VP-P. The minimum sensitivity 6
is 0.2 VP-P.
If the output is less than the minimum sensitivity, the measured values may be unstable.
• If using the pull-up function, do not let the voltage exceed the 0 to 5 V range. If the voltage
exceeds the range, the protection circuit will be tripped, and the pull-up circuit will be cut off. 7
Setting the Input Coupling
Set the coupling to DC or AC. You can change the setting only if the preset is set to
User.
8
Setting the Probe (Probe Attenuation)
Set the probe attenuation to 1:1 or 10:1. You can change the setting only if the preset
is set to Logic 5V (3V/12V/24V), ZeroCross, or User. 9
Setting the Range
Set the voltage range to ±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±20 V, or ±50 V. You can change the
setting only if the preset is set to ZeroCross or User. 10
Set the bandwidth limit to 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, or Full. You can change
the setting on all presets. However, if the preset is set to AC100V or AC200V, the 11
bandwidth limit cannot be set to Full.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-21
4.6 M
Setting the Threshold Level

Set the threshold level used to determine the period within the voltage range. You can
change the setting only if the preset is set to User.
Hysteresis
Period (when the slope is rising edge)

Threshold level
Setting the Hysteresis

Set Hys (hysteresis) to Low, Middle, or High. You can change the setting on all
presets.
If Changing the Slope Setting

Set the slope to or .
You can change the setting only if the preset is set to Logic 5V (3V/12V/24V), Pull-up
5V, or User.
Setting the Chatter Elimination Function

You can change the setting on all presets. This function eliminates the chatter that
occurs such when the contact input is turned ON/OFF. This allows changes in the
signal over the specified time to be ignored. Set the interval in the range of 0 to 1000
ms (1-ms resolution). This function applies to both the rising and falling slopes.
Setting the Pull-Up

If the preset is set to Pull-up 5V, set whether to use pull-up.
If using pull-up, set the input voltage in the range of 0 V to 5 V. If a voltage exceeding
this range is applied, the internal protection circuit will cut off the pull-up circuit.
Internal equivalent circuit when using pull-up
+5 V
10 kΩ
990 kΩ
10 kΩ
4-22 IM 720120-61E
Measuring the Frequency 1

Set the measurement item
(Set to frequency)
Set the measuring range (frequency range)
Set the offset 2
Turn smoothing filter ON/OFF and set the
moving average order of smoothing
Turn pulse average ON/OFF and set the
pulse average count 3
Set the stop prediction
Turn decelerating prediction ON/OFF

5
Setting the Measurement Item

Set the function to Frequency. The measurable range of frequencies is 0.01 Hz to 500 6
kHz.
Frequency (Hz) = 1/Tw (s)
Tw (s)

7
Setting the Measuring Range (Frequency Range)

Set the measuring range of frequency according to the frequency of the signal to be
8
measured. The selectable range is 1 Hz to 500 kHz in 1-2-5 steps.
Setting the Offset

Set the offset value in the range 0 to 100 times the measuring range or 0 to 200 kHz. 9
The frequency in the measuring range indicated above can be measured around the
specified offset value.
Below is an example for a measuring range of 10 Hz and offset of 200 kHz.
10
Measuring range
11
(10 Hz)
12
(200 kHz)
Offset
0 Hz
Setting the Smoothing Filter App

The SL1000 performs moving average of the order that is determined from a specified
time.
Moving average order = the specified time/40 μs (the specified time: 0.0 to 1000.0 ms)
Index
Setting the Pulse Average
4096 pulses). Specify 1 to not perform pulse averaging.
IM 720120-61E 4-23
4.6 M
Turning Decelerating Prediction ON/OFF

Select ON to automatically compute and predict the deceleration curve from the elapsed
time after the pulse stops. Select OFF to not perform decelerating prediction.
Setting the Stop Prediction

Set the time from the point when the pulse input stops to the point when the function
determines that the object has stopped. The time can be set to ×1.5, ×2, ×3, ... , ×9, and
×10 (10 settings) of the pulse period (T) of the pulse one period before the pulse input
stopped.
Select OFF to not perform stop prediction.
4-24 IM 720120-61E
Measuring the Number of Rotation 1

(Set to Rotation Pulse (rpm) or Rotation Pulse (rps))
Set the measuring range (rotation pulse range)
Set the offset 2
Turn smoothing filter ON/OFF and set the moving
average order of smoothing
Turn pulse average ON/OFF and set the pulse
average count 3
Set the number of pulses per rotation
4

5
Set the function to Rotation Pulse (rpm) or Rotation Pulse (rps). The measurable range
of rotations is 0.01 rpm to 100000 rpm or 0.001 rps to 2000 rps. 6
RPMs = Frequency (Hz)/the number of pulses per rotation (Nr) × 60
RPSs = Frequency (Hz)/the number of pulses per rotation (Nr)
F (Hz)
7
Nr: The number of pulses per rotation (1 to 99999)
Setting the Measuring Range (Rotation Pulse Range)

Set the measuring range of rotations according to the rotations of the signal to be 8
measured.
The selectable range is 1 rpm to 100000 rpm in 1-2-5 steps or 0.1 rps to 2000 rps in
1-2-5 steps.
Setting the Offset 9

Set the offset value.
The rotations in the measuring range indicated above can be measured around the
For Rotation Pulse (rpm): 0 to 100 times the rotation pulse range value or 0 to 50 krpm
For Rotation Pulse (rps): 0 to 100 times the rotation pulse range value or 0 to 1000 rps
10
Setting the Smoothing Filter
time. 11

4096 pulses). Specify 1 to not perform pulse averaging. 12
App
stopped. Select OFF to not perform stop prediction.
Index
Setting the Number of Pulses per Rotation

Set the number of pulses per rotation of the measured signal in the range of 1 to 99999
to determine the number of rotations.
IM 720120-61E 4-25
4.6 M
Measuring the Period

(Set the period)
Set the measuring range (period range)
Set the offset
pulse average count

Set the function to Period. The measurable range of period is 2 μs to 50 s.
Period (s) = Tw (s)
Tw (s)

Setting the Measuring Range (Period Range)

Set the measuring range of period according to the period of the signal to be measured.
The selectable range is 100 μs to 50 s in 1-2-5 steps.
Setting the Offset

Set the offset value in the range 0 to 1000 times the measuring range or 0 to 50 s.
The period in the measuring range indicated above can be measured around the

time.



stopped.
4-26 IM 720120-61E
Measuring the Duty Cycle 1

(Set to duty cycle) 2
Set the measuring range (duty cycle range)
Set the offset
moving average order of smoothing 3

4
Set the measurement pulse
Set the duty cycle of the positive or

negative pulse
5
Set the function to Duty. The measurable range of duty cycle is 0 to 100%.
Duty cycle = Thigh (s)/Tw (s) (if the measured pulse is positive) 6
Duty cycle = Tlow (s)/Tw (s) (if the measured pulse is negative)
Tw (s)
Thigh (s) Tlow (s) 7
Setting the Measuring Range (Duty Cycle Range)

Set the measuring range of duty cycle according to the duty cycle of the signal to be
8
measured.
Select 10, 20, 50, 100, or 200%.
Setting the Offset

9
The duty cycle in the measuring range indicated above can be measured around the
10
Selectable range: 0 to 100%
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-27
4.6 M

time.
4-28 IM 720120-61E
Measuring the Power Supply Frequency 1

(Set to Power Supply Freq.)
Set the measuring range (frequency range)
2
pulse average count 3


Set the center frequency
5

Set the function to Power Supply Freq.
6
The measurable range of power supply frequencies is (50 Hz, 60 Hz, or 400 Hz) ± 20 Hz.
Power supply frequency (Hz) = 1/Tw (s)
Resolution: 0.01 Hz
Tw (s)
7

Setting the Measuring Range (Frequency Range) 8

Set the measuring range of power supply frequency according to the frequency of the
signal to be measured.
Select 1, 2, 5, 10, or 20 Hz.
Measurement can be made in the range center frequency ± measuring range.
9

time. 10

Measures the input pulse by dividing the pulse by the specified number of pulses (1 to 11
Setting the Center Frequency

Set the center frequency of the measuring range. 12
Select 50, 60, or 400 Hz.
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-29
4.6 M
Measuring the Pulse Width

(Set to Pulse Width)
(pulse width range)
Set the offset
Turn smoothing filter ON/OFF and set
the moving average order of smoothing

Set the measurement pulse

Set the pulse width of the positive or
negative pulse

Set the function to Pulse Width. The measurable range of pulse widths is 1 μs to 50 s.
Pulse width = Thigh (s) (if the measured pulse is positive)
Pulse width = Tlow (s) (if the measured pulse is negative)
Thigh (s) Tlow (s)
Setting the Measuring Range (Pulse Width Range)

Set the measuring range of pulse width according to the pulse width of the signal to be
measured.
The selectable range is 100 μs to 50 s in 1-2-5 steps.
Setting the Offset

The pulse width in the measuring range indicated above can be measured around the
Selectable range: 0 to 100 times the pulse width range or 0 to 50 s

time.
Setting the Measurement Pulse

Set whether to measure the pulse width above the threshold level (positive) or the pulse
width below the threshold level (negative).
4-30 IM 720120-61E
Measuring the Pulse Integration 1

(Set to Pulse Integration)
(pulse integration range) 2
Set the offset
Turn smoothing filter ON/OFF and set
the moving average order of smoothing
Turn pulse average ON/OFF and set the 3

pulse average count
Set the unit/pulse (physical amount
per pulse)
Turn the over limit ON/OFF 4
Set the unit

Execute reset
5
Set the function to Pulse Integration. The measurable range of pulse integration is 0 to 2
×109 counts. 6
Pulse integrated value = N (count) × physical amount per pulse (I)
Set the physical amount per pulse (I) to distance or flow rate.
N (count) 7
l
Setting the Measuring Range (Pulse Integration Range)

Set the measuring range of pulse integration according to the pulse integration of the
8
signal to be measured.
The selectable range is 100.0E-21 to 5.0E+21 in 1-2-5 steps.
Setting the Offset 9

Set the offset value. Pulse integration in the measuring range indicated above is
performed around the specified offset value.
Selectable range: 100 times the pulse integration range or 1.0000E+22
10
time.
Moving average order = the specified time/40 μs (the specified time: 0.0 to 1000.0 ms) 11
4096 pulses). Specify 1 to not perform pulse averaging. 12
Setting the Unit/Pulse
Set the physical amount per pulse in the range of –9.9999E+30 to 9.9999E+30.
Setting the Over Limit

App
Turn over limit ON to reset the pulse count automatically when the range is exceeded.
Setting the Unit

If necessary, set the unit of the pulse integrated value using up to four characters. Index
Execute Reset
Resets the integrated value. Use this to reset the value that has been integrated up to
now.
IM 720120-61E 4-31
4.6 M
Measuring the Velocity

(Set to Velocity)
Set the measuring range (velocity range)
Set the offset
pulse average count
Set the velocity/pulse (velocity per pulse)
Set the time unit to Hour, Minute, or Second
Set the unit

Set the function to Velocity. The velocity corresponding to the pulse signal is measured.
The measurable frequency range of the pulse signal is 0.01 Hz to 500 kHz.
Velocity (km/h) = Distance per pulse l (km)/Tw (s) × 3600
Velocity (m/s) = Distance per pulse l (m)/Tw (s)
Tw (s)

Distance per
pulse (l)
Set the measuring range (velocity range)

Set the measuring range of velocity according to the velocity of the signal to be
measured.
The selectable range is 100.0E-21 to 5.0E+21 in 1-2-5 steps.
Setting the Offset

Set the offset value in the range 0 to 100 times the measuring range or 0 to 1.0000E+22.
The velocity in the measuring range indicated above can be measured around the

time.



stopped.
4-32 IM 720120-61E
Setting the Distance/Pulse 1

Set the distance per pulse in the range of –9.9999E+30 to 9.9999E+30.
Setting the Time Unit

Set the time unit to hour, minute, or second. 2
The output is automatically converted to a velocity with respect to the specified time.
Setting the Unit

Set the unit of velocity using up to four characters. The default setting is m/s.
3

5
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-33
4.7 Making Measurements Using an External Clock
Signal
The SL1000 can acquire data at the rising edges of an external clock signal that it
receives.



Set the clock source to external
Clock Source
By setting the clock source to external, the SL1000 can acquire data at the rising edges
of an external clock signal that it receives.
Apply a signal of the following specifications to the external clock signal I/O terminal of
the SL1000.
Item Specifications
Frequency range See Note below
Input level TTL (0 to 5 V)
Valid edge Rising edge
Minimum pulse width 100 ns or more for high and low
External clock frequency range 5 MHz maximum
Rise/Fall time of the clock 100 ns or less
Note
The upper frequency limit of the external clock varies depending on the module.
If the external clock frequency exceeds the upper frequency limit of the module, sampling is
executed at the upper frequency limit.
701250/701251/701255: 1 MHz
701267/701270/701271/701275: 100 kHz
701281: 1 MHz
701261/701262 When measuring voltage: 100 kHz
When measuring temperature: 500 Hz
701265: 500 Hz
720210/720211: 5 MHz
4-34 IM 720120-61E
4.7 Making Measurements Using an External Clock Signal
Notes When Sampling Using the External Clock Signal 1

• The ACQ mode cannot be set to Envelope or Box Average.
• No function is provided for frequency-dividing the clock signal.
• The time measured by the cursor measurement or automated measurement of
waveform parameters is expressed in the number of pulses of the clock signal. No unit 2
is displayed.
• You cannot set the trigger delay or hold off.

5
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-35
4.8 Making Measurements Using Triggers
The SL1000 can acquire data by using the measured waveform, power supply signal of
the SL1000, time, or external trigger signal as triggers.

Set the measuring mode to Triggered Displays the number of samples

and the trigger mode determined from the measuring
Set the measuring time Set the trigger count time and sample rate (sample interval)
Set the trigger condition
Setting the Triggered Mode

Select Normal, Single, or Single (N).
Normal: When a trigger occurs, the SL1000 acquires data for a specified time.
After internal processing is completed, the SL1000 will accept the
next trigger. The SL1000 will not accept a trigger while the internal
processing is in progress even if the trigger condition is met.
After acquiring the data for the specified trigger counts, the SL1000
stops the measurement.
Single: The SL1000 acquires the data for a single trigger that occurs. After
internal processing is completed, the SL1000 stops the measurement.
Single (N): The SL1000 acquires the data if the next trigger condition is met
even if the internal processing of the data acquired from the previous
trigger is still in progress. The SL1000 will accept all triggers when the
trigger condition is met, but buffer overflow may occur.
Note
You cannot select Single (N) during synchronous operation.
Trigger Count
If the trigger mode is set to Normal or Single (N), the SL1000 will acquire the data the
specified number of times. If Infinite is selected, the SL1000 continues to acquire data
until the measurement is stopped.
If the trigger mode is Single (N), the maximum trigger count that you can set is 5000.
However, this limit may be lower depending on the number of channels, sample rate, and
measuring time.
4-36 IM 720120-61E
Normal mode 1
Trigger
2
Data acquisition Data transmission/recording Data acquisition Data transmission/recording
(Dead time) (Dead time)
Memory PC HDD Memory PC HDD

Waveform display Waveform display 3
Data acquisition and data transfer/recording are synchronous.
Single (N) mode
4
Trigger

Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition
Memory Memory Memory Memory
5
PC HDD PC HDD PC HDD
Waveform display* Waveform display* Waveform display*
6
Data transmission/recording Data transmission/recording Data transmission/recording
Data acquisition and data transfer/recording are asynchronous.
*: The software may not be able to display the acquired data, depending on the internal processing time
and trigger timing. 7
Setting the Measuring Time
Set the measuring time value, and select the unit. The SL1000 acquires data for a
specified time after it receives a trigger. 8
The selectable range varies depending on the sample rate and the number of channels.
Maximum measuring time (s) = Number of measured points/sample rate
Minimum measuring time (seconds) = 1000/sample rate
The number of measured points changes as follows depending on the number of 9
channels (see appendix 2 for details).
Number of Registered Maximum number of measured Maximum number of measured
Channels points(single mode) points (modes other than single)
2 50000000 10000000 10
4 25000000 10000000
8 10000000 5000000
10, 12, 14, 16 5000000 2500000
Example 11
Selectable range of measuring time when the number of registered channels is 4 and the
sample rate is 100 S/s
1000/100 to 25000000/100 = 10 s to 250000 s
12
Selectable range of measuring time when the number of registered channels is 5 and the
sample rate is 5 MS/s
1000/5000000 to 10000000/5000000 = 0.0002 s to 2 s
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-37
The measuring time resolution is the minimum measuring time at the lowest sample rate
among the four measuring groups. However, if the number of measured points (measuring
time × measuring group 1 sample rate) is greater than or equal to 100000 or greater than
or equal to 400000 and there are measuring groups whose sample rate is greater than or
equal to 10 MS/s, the resolution is as follows:
Sample Rate Resolution (s)
100 MS/s 0.005 (the number of measured points is greater than or equal to 500000)
If there are multiple measuring groups that meet the above conditions, the resolution is
equal to the least common multiple of the resolutions corresponding to the sample rates
set for those measuring groups. For example, if there are measuring groups with sample
rates set to 100 MS/s and 50 MS/s, the resolution is the least common multiple of 0.005
s and 0.01 s which is 0.01 s.
Note
If the trigger mode is set to Normal or Single (N) and the measuring time setting exceeds
the maximum measuring time, the trigger mode will be changed to Single. For details on the
maximum measuring time, see appendix 2.
Setting the Trigger Conditions

Click the Trigger Settings button to display the Trigger Settings screen.
Set the trigger class Set the trigger source
Set the trigger conditions

The settings vary depending on the
trigger class and trigger source

Set the pre-trigger Set the trigger delay Set the hold off
4-38 IM 720120-61E
Applying Triggers Using the Measured Waveform or External Trigger Signal 1

Trigger Source
Select Channel. The trigger source is fixed to Channel if the trigger class is combination.
Trigger Class 2
Select Simple or Combination.
Simple: A trigger is generated on a single trigger condition.
Combination: A trigger is generated on the logical condition of multiple trigger sources.
3
If the trigger class is set to combination
Set the logical condition
(If the trigger class is set to combination)
Set the trigger class
4

Select the trigger source
Set the trigger pattern
Set the trigger level
Set the window width
5
(If the trigger pattern is set to
IN, OUT, IN(L), or OUT(L))
6
Set the hysteresis
7
Copy the trigger source
settings
Paste the trigger source 8
settings
If the trigger class is set to simple

9
Select the trigger source
Select the trigger slope
Select the trigger level
Select the trigger hysteresis 10
Logical Condition
If the trigger class is set to Combination, set the logical condition of the trigger sources.
OR: A trigger is generated if any of the trigger conditions of the specified trigger
sources is met.
11
AND: A trigger is generated if all of the trigger conditions of the specified trigger sources
are met.
Trigger Source 12
You can select the trigger source from all the channels registered in measuring groups
and external trigger.
The external trigger is displayed as EXT.
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-39
Trigger Pattern
Select the trigger pattern from nine types for a measuring channel and from four types for
the external trigger.
: A trigger is generated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger
level to above the trigger level (rising edge). This pattern can also be selected
for the external trigger.
: A trigger is generated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger
level to below the trigger level (falling edge). This pattern can also be selected
for the external trigger.
: A trigger is generated on both the rising and falling edges.
H: A trigger is generated when the trigger source is greater than or equal to the
trigger level.
L: A trigger is generated when the trigger source is less than or equal to the trigger
level.
IN: A trigger is generated when the trigger source enters a range between two
trigger levels from the outside.
OUT: A trigger is generated when the trigger source exits from a range between two
trigger levels from the inside.
IN(L): A trigger is generated when the trigger source is within a range between two
trigger levels.
OUT(L): A trigger is generated when the trigger source is outside a range between two
trigger levels.
Trigger Level
When measuring voltage
Selectable range: Within the positive and negative voltage range
Resolution: /1000 of the voltage range
When measuring temperature
Selectable range: Measurable range of each thermocouple (up to 280K for
Au7Fe)
Resolution: 0.1 °C or 0.1 K (set within the measurement range (varies
depending on the thermocouple type)
For a description of the measurement range of thermocouples, see section 4.3.
When measuring strain
Selectable range: ±(Measurable range)
Resolution: 1 μSTR or 0.0005 mV/V
When measuring acceleration
Selectable range: ±(Measurable range)
Resolution: 0.01 (Unit)
When measuring frequency

Selectable range: Offset value ± (each measuring range*)
Resolution: See the table below.
Measured Item Resolution
Frequency, rotations, 1/20000 of the measuring range* when the measuring range is a
period, and pulse width power of 10.
1/10000 of the measuring range* when the measuring range is 2 or 5
times a power of 10.
The minimum resolutions are as follows: 0.001 Hz for frequency, 0.001
rpm or 0.1 rps for rotations, 1 μs for period, and 1 μs for pulse width.
Duty cycle and power 1/10000 of the measuring range
supply frequency The minimum resolution for power supply frequency is 0.001 Hz.
Pulse integration and Depends on the measuring range
velocity
* Each measuring range of frequency, number of rotations, period, duty cycle, power
supply frequency, pulse width, pulse integration, and velocity. For details, see
section 4.6.
4-40 IM 720120-61E
You can also set the trigger level by dragging the trigger level arrow on the screen. 1
However, you cannot change it while recording is in progress.
Drag to move
4
Window Width

Set the window width if the trigger pattern is set to IN, OUT, IN(L), or OUT(L).
The selectable range is from the resolution to the absolute value of the maximum
5
selectable trigger level. The resolutions are as follows:
Measured Item Resolution
Voltage, frequency, number of rotations, period, duty 1/100 of the measuring range
cycle, power supply frequency, pulse width, pulse
integration, and velocity 6
Temperature 0.1°C or 0.1K
Strain 1 μSTR or 0.0005 mV/V
Acceleration (100/measuring range)/sensitivity
The minimum resolution is 0.01 unit. 7
Hysteresis
Sets a width to the trigger level or window so that triggers are not generated by small
changes in the trigger signal. Select the trigger hysteresis from Low, Middle, and High of
the measuring range.
8
Copying and Pasting Settings
If the trigger class is set to Combination, the trigger source settings can be copied and
pasted to other trigger sources. 9
Click the line number of the trigger source you want to copy to select the line.
Click the Copy button.
Select the destination trigger source line, and click the Paste button.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-41
Generating Triggers on the Power Signal

Set the trigger class Set the trigger source to Line
Trigger Source
Set the trigger source to Line.
A trigger is generated on the rising edge of the power supply signal that is being supplied
to the SL1000. Waveforms synchronized to the commercial power supply frequency (50
Hz or 60 Hz) can be observed.
Trigger Mode and Trigger Class

The trigger class is fixed to simple.
Generating Triggers on the Time

Set the trigger class Set the trigger source to Time
Set the trigger time Set the trigger interval
Trigger Source
Set the trigger source to Time.
Triggers are generated at specified time intervals from a specified time.
Trigger Mode and Trigger Class

The trigger class is fixed to simple.
Reference Time for Generating Triggers

Set the date and time for generating the trigger.
Time Interval for Generating Triggers

Select from the following intervals.
1min, 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 6min, 7min, 8min, 9min, 10min, 15min, 20min, 25min,
30min, 40min, 45min, 50min, 1hour, 2hour, 3hour, 4hour, 5hour, 6hour, 7hour, 8hour,
9hour, 10hour, 11hour, 12hour, 18hour, and 24hour
Notes on Time Triggers

• Depending on the time interval setting, a trigger may occur while the waveform is
being acquired or during the pre-trigger period (a preparation period for observing the
waveform before the trigger time). In this happens, the trigger is ignored.
• If the specified time is in the past, triggers are generated from a time in the future that
satisfies the following expression: the specified time + time interval × N where N is an
integer.
• If you specify the acquisition count, the waveforms are acquired the specified number
of times. If it is set to infinite, the waveforms are acquired until the measurement is
stopped.
• The trigger delay and hold off time settings are invalid for Time Trigger.
4-42 IM 720120-61E
Setting the Pre-Trigger, Trigger Delay, and Hold Off 1

5
Set the pre-trigger Set the trigger delay Set the hold off
6
Setting the Pre-Trigger
Set the pre-trigger percentage by considering the measuring time to be 100%. The
selectable range is 0 to 100%, and the resolution is 0.1%. If measuring using an external
clock signal, set the pre-trigger in terms of the number of data points. The selectable 7
range is 0 to the number of measured points –1.
You can also set the pre-trigger by dragging the trigger position on the screen. However,
you cannot change it while recording is in progress. If you change it while measurement
is stopped, the previous position is indicated in white. 8
Previous trigger position (displayed only
when measurement is stopped)
Current trigger position
9

10
Drag to move
11
Setting the Trigger Delay

Set the delay time from the trigger point. The selectable range is 0 to 10 s (the default
setting is 0 s). The resolution is 10 ns if the sample rate of measuring group 1 is greater
12
than or equal to 10 MS/s and 1/(the sample rate of measuring group 1) * 1/10 if the
sample rate of measuring group 1 is less than or equal to 5 MS/s.
The relationship between the pre-trigger and trigger delay is as follows:
App
Trigger position
Trigger delay
Index
Pre-trigger
Measuring time
Trigger point
IM 720120-61E 4-43
Hold Off Time

This function prevents a trigger from being generated for a specified time, even if the
trigger conditions are met during this time. The selectable range is 0 s to 10 s (the default
setting is 0 s), and the resolution is 10 ns.
If the trigger pattern is set to rising edge
Repetition period
Hold off time
Measuring time Measuring time
Trigger level

Input signal
Trigger Invalid trigger Trigger
Acquired waveform
If you are setting the hold off time a value greater than or equal to 50 ms, set the trigger
mode to Normal.
Using Manual Triggers

Manual triggers allows you to generate a trigger at any time to perform measurement
and recording.
Click the Manual Trigger button or choose Manual Trigger on the Acquisition menu.
A trigger is generated, and the SL1000 will acquire the data.
Manual Trigger button
4-44 IM 720120-61E
4.9 Setting the Alarm 1
The SL1000 can generate an alarm based on the measured waveform level or the
system status of the SL1000 and transmit an alarm signal from its alarm terminal. 2
1. Click the Alarm Settings button or choose Alarm Settings on the Acquisition
menu.
Alarm Settings button 3

5
The Alarm Settings screen opens. 7

Generate alarms on the measured waveform level
Generate alarms on system conditions
Set the alarm output

9

10
Generating Alarms on the Measured Waveform Level (Channel Alarm in Free 11

Run Mode)
Click the Channel Alarm button. The Channel Alarm Settings screen opens.
You can also display the same screen by clicking the Channel Alarm Settings button on
the Measurement Settings screen. 12
Channel alarm settings
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-45
4.9 Setting the Alarm
Set the logical condition
Select the alarm source channel Set the alarm pattern
Set alarm level 1

Set the hysteresis 1
Set alarm level 2
(if the alarm pattern is set to IN(L) or OUT(L))
Set the hysteresis 2

(if the alarm pattern is set to IN(L) or OUT(L))
Paste the alarm source channel settings

Copy the alarm source channel settings
Logical Condition
Set the alarm logical condition if multiple channels are selected for the alarm source.
OR: An alarm is generated if any of the alarm conditions of the specified channels is
met.
AND: An alarm is generated if all of the alarm conditions of the specified channels are
met.
OFF: Turns the channel alarm OFF.
ON/OFF
You can select the alarm source from all the channels registered in measuring groups.
Note
The Channel Alarm Settings screen displays all channels, including modules that are linked for
synchronous operation.
Alarm Pattern
H: An alarm is generated when the alarm source is greater than or equal to the
alarm level.
L: An alarm is generated when the alarm source is less than or equal to the alarm
level.
IN(L): An alarm is generated when the alarm source is within the range between two
alarm levels.
OUT(L): An alarm is generated when the alarm source is outside the range between two
alarm levels.
Alarm Level
If the alarm pattern is IN(L) or OUT(L), set both alarm levels 1 and 2. Make sure that
alarm level 1 is greater than alarm level 2.
You can also set the alarm level by dragging it on the screen.
The selectable range of alarm levels is the same as that of trigger levels.

The alarm settings can be copied and pasted to other channels.
Click the line number of the channel you want to copy to select the line.
Select the destination channel line, and click the Paste button.
4-46 IM 720120-61E
Generating Alarms Based on the SL1000 System Status 1

On the Alarm Settings screen, select the system alarm that you want to enable.
Generate an alarm when the free space

on the internal hard disk is low 2
Generate an alarm if an overrun occurs
in the internal memory buffer

Generate an alarm if the fan stops
Generate an alarm if the synchronous 3
connecting cable is disconnected
during synchronous operation.
You can set the alarm by combining the following three items. 4
HDD Full: An alarm is generated if the free space on the internal hard disk
of the SL1000 falls low.

Acq Memory Overrun: An alarm is generated if the internal memory buffer of the
SL1000 overflows. 5
Fan Stop: An alarm is generated if the cooling fan of the SL1000 stops.
Sync. Failure Detection An alarm is generated when a synchronous connecting cable is
disconnected during synchronous operation of the SL1000.
6
Notes on the Alarm Function
The SL1000 may fail to detect alarms if alarms occur at intervals less than or equal to
500 ms. 7
Alarm Output
8
Turn the alarm output ON/OFF
Reset the alarm output
Select the alarm output type
Set whether to hold the alarm output level
9
(if set to channel alarm)
10
Turning the Alarm Output ON/OFF

ON: When an alarm occurs, the SL1000 (the master unit with unit ID zero during 11
synchronous operation) generates an alarm signal from the alarm output terminal.
OFF: Does not transmit an alarm signal even if an alarm occurs.
Alarm Type 12
Select whether to transmit channel alarms or system alarms.
Output Release
Releases the alarm output state. App
Note
Only the master unit generates an alarm during synchronous operation.
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-47
Output Hold
ON: Holds the alarm signal level once an alarm occurs. Selecting Release returns
the alarm signal to its original level.
OFF: When an alarm occurs, an alarm signal is output. When the alarm clears, the
alarm signal also returns to its original level.
ON (hold) OFF (not hold)
Alarm level Alarm level
Alarm No alarm Alarm No alarm

occurrence occurrence
4-48 IM 720120-61E
4.10 Setting the GO/NO-GO Judgment (for Triggered 1
Mode)
The SL1000 performs GO/NO-GO judgment on whether the value of a waveform
parameter is within a specified range and executes a given action based on the judgment 2
result.
1. Click the GO/NO-GO Settings button or choose GO/NO-GO Settings on the
Acquisition menu.
GO/NO-GO Settings button 3

5
The GO/NO-GO Judgment Settings screen opens. 7

Set GO/NO-GO
Set the judgment conditions
Turn ON/OFF GO/NO-GO judgment 8

and set the item to be judged

Set the GO/NO-GO judgment action
Set the action to be executed based
on the result of GO/NO-GO judgment 9
Note 10
You cannot configure GO/NO-GO judgment during synchronous operation.
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-49
4.10 Setting the GO/NO-GO Judgment (for Triggered Mode)
Setting the Parameter Judgment Conditions

Click the Wave Parameter button.
Set the logical condition Select the judgment mode
Set the judgment area Select the waveform parameter
Detail settings of waveform
parameters (see section 7.2)
Set the upper and lower limits
of the judgment area
Apply the settings and close

the screen
Cancel the settings and close
the screen
Copy the judgment conditions Paste the judgment conditions
Select the source channel
Turn the judgment condition ON/OFF
Logical Condition
Set the logical condition if you selected multiple judgment conditions.
OR: Executes the judgment action if any of the specified judgment conditions is met.
AND: Executes the judgment action if all of the specified judgment conditions are met.
Judgment Area
ACQ Data: Judges on all acquired data.
Between Cursors: Judges data between two cursors.
For a description of cursors, see section 7.1.
Parameter Detail Settings

You can set the distal, mesial, and proximal lines. These settings are the same as the
settings for waveform parameters in section 7.2. For details, see section 7.2. These
settings are synchronized with the waveform parameter settings of section 7.2.
No.
You can set up to 16 judgment conditions. The judgment conditions for the numbers
whose check box is selected are enabled.
Channel
Select the source channel of the waveform parameter. You can select from channel
registered in measuring groups.
Mode
Set the condition of the value of the specified waveform parameter with respect to the
specified range for performing GO/NO-GO judgment.
IN: Judges GO if the value of the specified waveform parameter is within the
specified range.
OUT: Judges GO if the value of the specified waveform parameter is outside the
specified range.
Parameter
You can select from the waveform parameters given in section 7.2. The value of the
selected waveform parameter is used to perform GO/NO-GO judgment. For details on
waveform parameters, see section 7.2.
4-50 IM 720120-61E
4.10 Setting the GO/NO-GO Judgment (for Triggered Mode)
Upper and Lower Limits 1

Set the range used to perform GO/NO-GO judgment on the specified waveform
parameter. You can set the limits between –9.9999E+30 to 9.9999E+30 depending on
the parameter.

2
The settings of a GO/NO-GO judgment number can be copied to another GO/NO-GO
judgment number.
Click the GO/NO-GO judgment number you want to copy to select the line.
3
Select the line of the destination GO/NO-GO judgment number, and click the Paste
button.
GO/NO-GO Judgment 4
Turns ON/OFF the GO/NO-GO judgment.

GO/NO-GO Settings
Select Wave Parameter. 5
Judgment Action
Always: Always executes the action.
True: Executes the action when the specified GO condition is met.
False: Executes the action when the specified GO condition is not met. 6
If Always is specified in Triggered Mode, the specified action is executed each time a
trigger occurs.
7
Action
Save Data: Saves the waveform data in binary format to the recording destination
(SL1000 internal hard disk (option) or hard disk of your PC) specified in
Recording Settings. The extension is .wdf. 8
The file name follows the auto naming setting specified in Recording
Settings. For details on auto naming, see chapter 5.
Buzzer: Sounds a buzzer.
9
Notes When Action Is Set to Save Data
• The maximum number of files that can be created in a single directory is 1000. Avoid
placing files in the save destination folder before starting the GO/NO-GO judgment.
• If the auto naming of file names is set to Date, creating files takes a long time when 10
the number of saved files becomes large. Select NumberingDate if you are creating
many files.
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-51
4.11 Performing Auto Setup
The measuring range of channels registered to measuring group 1 can be automatically
set according to the measured signal. Auto setup is applied only to channels in
measuring group 1.
1. Click the Auto Setup button or choose Auto Setup on the Acquisition menu.
Auto Setup button
2. Select the channel to be automatically set up, and click Execute. Auto setup is
executed, and the measurement settings are changed.
Select the channels

Execute auto setup

Cancel auto setup
(restore the original settings)
Close the screen
If ALL is selected, auto setup is executed on all channels registered in measuring

groups.
Note
• You can only cancel auto setup immediately after you execute auto setup while the Auto
Setup Settings screen is open. If you close the Auto Setup Settings screen with the OK
button, you will not be able to cancel.
• During synchronous operation, you can select linked SL1000 channels as channels on a
single SL1000.
4-52 IM 720120-61E
4.12 Starting and Stopping the Measurement 1
Starting the Measurement

Click the Start Monitoring button or choose Start Monitoring on the Acquisition menu. 2
Acquisition menu
3
Stop Monitoring button
Start Monitoring button
When the measurement is started, the SL1000 acquires the data in its internal memory. 4
If the waveform display is enabled, the waveform is displayed.

If using the trigger function, the SL1000 enters the trigger-wait state.
Note 5
Starting the measurement does not cause the measured data to be recorded to the hard disk of
the SL1000 or your PC.
To record the measured data, start the recording (see chapter 5).
6
Stopping the Measurement
Click the Stop Monitoring button or choose Stop Monitoring on the Acquisition menu.
If you stop the measurement while recording or display updating is in progress, the
recording and display updating also stop.
7
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 4-53
Chapter 5 Recording Measured Data
5.1 Recording Measured Data Immediately as the 1

Measurement Is Started (Free Run Mode)
The SL1000 will immediately record data if the measuring mode is Free Run and it is
ready to record. 2
1. Click the Recording Settings button or choose Recording Settings from the
Acquisition menu.
Display the Acquisition menu Recording Settings button
3

The Recording Settings screen opens.

4
Setting the recording destination
Set the recording start condition
Set to Immediate 5
Displays the maximum recording
time (size) per file
Recording Measured Data

Set the recording stop condition 6
Set the repeat conditions of recording
(depends on the start and stop conditions)
Set the file to be recorded

7
Move to the Display Settings screen 8

Destination 9
Set the data recording destination.
PC HDD: Records to the hard disk of the PC that this software was installed to.
Unit HDD: Records to the internal hard disk of the SL1000.
PC HDD+Unit HDD: Records both to the hard disk of your PC and to the internal hard 10
disk of the SL1000.
The internal hard disk of the SL1000s is an option. Unit HDD and PC HDD+Unit HDD are
valid on models with this option.
Note 11
• In the case of PC HDD + Unit HDD, the same data is recorded to the PC and to the SL1000.
However, if you start recording by pressing START on the SL1000, data will only be
recorded to the SL1000 until the PC receives recorded data. Once the PC receives recorded
data, the same data is recorded to the PC and to the SL1000. 12
• During synchronous operation, you cannot select PC HDD+Unit HDD.
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 5-1
5.1 Recording Measured Data Immediately as the Measurement Is Started (Free Run Mode)
Start Condition
Select the recording start condition from the available choices below. Select Immediate.
Immediate: Starts recording as soon as it is ready to record.*You can select whether
to record until the recording is stopped, record until a specified time,
record for a specified recording time, or record until an alarm occurs.
Abs.Time: Starts recording at a specified time if it is ready to record.*You can
select whether to record until the recording is stopped, record until a
specified time, record for a specified recording time, or record until an
alarm occurs.
Alarm: Starts recording if an alarm occurs when it is ready to record.*You can
select whether to record until the recording is stopped, record for a
specified recording time, or record until the alarm is released.
External trigger: When External Trigger (Rise) is specified, recording starts when the
SL1000 receives a rising edge of the external signal. When External
Trigger (Fall) is specified, recording starts when the SL1000 receives
a falling edge of the external trigger signal. You can select whether to
continue recording until you manually stop it or to stop recording when
an external trigger occurs.
Stop Condition
Select the recording stop condition from the available choices below. If the recording start
condition was set to Immediate, select Continuous, Abs.Time, Recording Time, Alarm or
External Trigger.
Continuous: Continues to record until the recording is stopped.
Abs.Time: Stops recording at a specified time.
Recording Time: Stops the recording after a specified time elapses from the start of the
recording. The selectable range is as follows:
Recording Time (When using the internal clock)
0.1* to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s) (if the recording
interval is set to OFF)
0.001* to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s) (if the recording
interval is not set to OFF)
Recording Points (When using an external clock)
10 to 2000000000 points
* The recording time must be long enough so that at least 1 data point can be
measured. If the sample rate is 5 S/s, the recording time must be greater than
or equal to 0.2 s.
Alarm: If the recording start condition is not set to Alarm, the recording stops
when an alarm occurs. If the recording start condition is set to Alarm,
the recording stops when the alarm is released. The alarm must be set
in advance according to the procedure in section 4.9.
External trigger: When External Trigger (Rise) is specified, recording stops when the
SL1000 receives a rising edge of the external trigger signal. When
External Trigger (Fall) is specified, recording stops when the SL1000
receives a falling edge of the external trigger signal.
If you select Abs.Time or Recording Time, set the date/time or time. You can click the
arrow to select from the list or click the box to type the value directly.
5-2 IM 720120-61E
Record Interval 1
If the recording start condition is set to Immediate, you can set the interval only if the
recording stop condition is set to Recording Time.
The recording is repeated at the specified interval from the start of the recording.
Set the recording interval to OFF or to a value in the range of 1 to 86400 s. When using 2
an external clock, you can set the recording interval in the range of 2 to 1000000 points.
ACQ Start ACQ Stop
Measurement state Rec Start Rec Stop 3

Recordable
Record interval
Record state
Recording start
condition met 4
Records the Records the Recording stop
measured data measured data condition met
If the record interval is set to OFF, the next recording starts immediately after the
previous recording is finished.
5
Note

If the recording interval is set to OFF and the recording stop condition is set to a recording time
less than or equal to 1 s, the SL1000 may not be able to keep up with the recording operation, 6
and a buffer overrun may occur.
No. of Recordings
Set the number of times to repeat the recording. You can set a value in the range of 1 to
100000.
7
If set to Infinite, the recording is repeated until you click the Stop Recording button or
choose Stop Recording from the Acquisition menu.
Folder 8
Set the recording folder on the PC hard disk. You do not have to set the folder, if you are
recording only to the internal hard disk of the SL1000.
Click ... to open a dialog box for browsing folders.
By default, data is recorded to the SL1000 folder that is created in My Documents. 9
Measured data is saved to a folder named according to the date within the folder
specified here. The folder name is the date followed by a sequence number. The name
of the date folder is the same between the PC and the SL1000.
20070630_000 10
Year Sequence Number (000 to 999)
Month Day
A folder can contain up to 1000 files. If the number of files exceeds 1000, a new folder 11
with an incremented sequence number is created. However, if File Order is set to Cyclic
(see below), the specified number of files can be saved even if the number of files
exceeds 1000.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 5-3
Name
Set the file name. A sequence number is automatically appended to the specified file
name. You do not have to set the name if you are using the date for auto naming.
If a file that data is being recorded to exceeds 2 GB, the file will be automatically divided
into 2 GB segments. Up to 12 GB (six files) can be recorded.
Auto Naming
Using the Date/Time in the File Name
The date/time (ms unit) of the recording is used for the file name. An arbitrary file name
cannot be specified. You cannot use this function when File Order is set to Cyclic.
20070630_121530_100_000 (2007/06/30 12:15:30.100)
Year Sequence number when a single file
Month ms exceeds 2 GB (000 to 999)
Day Second
Minute
Hour
Using a Sequence Number in the File Name
A sequence number is added to a file name that you specify.
TEST0000_000
Sequence number when a single file exceeds 2 GB (000 to 999)

Character string
During synchronous operation, if the recording destination is PC HDD, the unit ID is
added to the front of the file name. For example, for unit ID0, the name of the file in the
above example becomes "0_TEST0000_000."
Note
• Files that are divided into 2-GB segments are managed as one file. You can view all of the
data (up to 2 GB per channel) using Xviewer that is included with this software (excluding
the /XV0 option).
• When displaying waveforms on Xviewer, select the file with the sequence number 000 when
files are divided as a result of a file exceeding 2 GB. You cannot open the file if you select a
file with the sequence number 001 or later.
• You cannot use date and time for file names during synchronous operation. File names only
take on sequence numbers.
• If the destination is PC HDD + Unit HDD and the trigger mode is Single(N), the names of
the files saved to the PC may be different than that saved to the SL1000, depending on the
names of files remaining on the hard disk.
• If the file size per channel per file exceeds 2 G samples (indicated by Max. Rec. Time/file
on the Recording Settings screen), the SL1000 temporarily stops recording and restarts
recording to a different file. No data dropout occurs during this process.
5-4 IM 720120-61E
File Order 1
You can limit the number of files that are recorded to the specified destination.
Sequential: Records files until there is no more free space on the destination hard
disk. When the number of files in one folder exceeds 1000, the Acquisition
Software records to a new folder. 2
Cyclic: You can specify the number of files to be recorded to the destination hard
disk. If the number of files reaches this number, recording continues by
overwriting the oldest files. Set the number of files in the range of 1 to 1000.
File names only take on sequence numbers.
3
Note
In Cyclic mode, files are numbered from 0000 each time you start recording. Therefore, old files
with the same name are overwritten. If you want to keep the old files, select Sequential. 4
Comment
Enter any necessary comments using up to 250 characters.
5
Starting the Recording
Click the Start Recording button or choose Start Recording from the Acquisition

menu. The SL1000 will be ready to record, and it will start recording if the recording start
condition is met. 6
Start Recording button

7
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 5-5
5.2 Recording Measured Data from a Specified
Time (Free Run Mode)
This section explains how to record data at a specified time.
Acquisition menu.

Set the recording destination (section 5.1)

Set to Abs.Time
Set the recording stop condition


(see section 5.1)

Move to the Display Settings screen
Destination
For details, see section 5.1.
Start Condition
Select the recording start condition. Here, select Abs.Time. For details, see section 5.1.
Abs.Time: Starts recording at a specified time if it is ready to record.*You can select
whether to record until the recording is stopped, record until a specified
time, record for a specified recording time, or record until an alarm occurs.
To set the start time, click the arrow to select from the list or click the box to type the
value directly.
5-6 IM 720120-61E
5.2 Recording Measured Data from a Specified Time (Free Run Mode)
Stop Condition 1
Select the recording stop condition. If the recording start condition was set to Abs.Time,
select Continuous, Abs.Time, Recording Time, Alarm, or External Trigger. For details, see
section 5.1.
Continuous: Continues to record until the recording is stopped. 2
Abs.Time: Stops recording at a specified time.
recording. The selectable range is as follows:
3
0.1 to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s) (if the recording
interval is set to OFF)
0.001 to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s) (if the recording
interval is not set to OFF)
4
10 to 2000000000 points
Alarm: Stops the recording if an alarm occurs. The alarm must be set in
5
advance according to the procedure in section 4.9.
If you select Abs.Time or Recording Time, set the date/time or time. You can click the

arrow to select from the list or click the box to type the value directly.
6
Record Interval
If the recording start condition is set to Abs.Time, you can set the interval only if the
recording stop condition is set to Recording Time. For details, see section 5.1.
Note 7
If the recording interval is set to OFF and the recording stop condition is set to a recording time
less than or equal to 1 s, the SL1000 may not be able to keep up with the recording operation,
and a buffer overrun may occur.
8
No. of Recordings
If the recording start condition is set to Abs.Time and the recording stop condition is set
to Recording Time, set the repeat count. For details, see section 5.1.
9
Folder, Name, File Order, and Comment
These settings are common regardless of the recording method. See section 5.1.
Starting the Recording 10

condition is met.
11

12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 5-7
5.3 Recording Measured Data from When an Alarm
Occurs (Free Run Mode)
This section explains how to record data when an alarm occurs.
Acquisition menu.


Set to Alarm


(see section 5.1)

Destination
Start Condition
Select the recording start condition. Here, select Alarm. For details, see section 5.1.
Alarm: Starts recording if an alarm occurs when it is ready to record.*You can
select whether to record until the recording is stopped, record for a
specified recording time, or record until the alarm is released.
5-8 IM 720120-61E
5.3 Recording Measured Data from When an Alarm Occurs (Free Run Mode)
Stop Condition 1
Select the recording stop condition. If the recording start condition was set to Alarm,
select Continuous, Recording Time, or Alarm. For details, see section 5.1.
Continuous: Continues to record until the recording is stopped.
Recording Time: Stops the recording after a specified time elapses from the start of the 2
recording.
The selectable range is as follows:
0.1 to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s)
3
10 to 2000000000 points
Alarm: Stops the recording if the alarm is released. The alarm must be set in 4
advance according to the procedure in section 4.9.
External Trigger (Fall) is specified, recording stops when the SL1000 5

If you select Recording Time, set the time.
If the recording stop condition is set to Alarm, data is recorded while the alarm status 6
continues.
ACQ Start ACQ Stop

7
Recordable

Record state Records the measured data 8
Alarm
Alarm occurrence Alarm release
9
No. of Recordings
If the recording stop condition is set to Recording Time or Alarm, set the repeat count.
10
These settings are common regardless of the recording method. For details, see section
5.1.
11
condition is met. 12

App
Note
If alarms occur consecutively at intervals less than or equal to 1 s, the SL1000 may not be able
to keep up with the recording operation, and a buffer overrun may occur. Index
IM 720120-61E 5-9
5.4 Recording by Applying External Trigger
Signals (in Free Run Mode)
This section explains how to record data by applying external trigger signals when the
measurement mode is set to Free Run.
Acquisition menu.

Setting the recording destination

Set to Ext Trigger (Rise) or Ext Trigger (Fall)
Displays the maximum recording

time (size) per file


Destination
Start Condition
Select the recording start condition. Here, select Ext Trigger (Rise) or Ext Trigger (Fall).
External trigger: When External Trigger (Rise) is specified, recording starts when the
External Trigger (Fall) is specified, recording starts when the SL1000
5-10 IM 720120-61E
5.4 Recording by Applying External Trigger Signals (in Free Run Mode)
Stop Condition 1
Select the recording stop condition. If the recording start condition was set to Ext Trigger
(Rise) or Ext Trigger (Fall), select Continuous, Recording Time, Ext Trigger (Rise), or Ext
Trigger (Fall). For details, see section 5.1.
Continuous: Continues to record until the recording is stopped. 2
recording.
The selectable range is as follows:
3
0.1 to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s)
10 to 2000000000 points 4
External Trigger (Fall) is specified, recording stops when the SL1000
receives a falling edge of the external trigger signal. 5
If you select Recording Time, set the time.

Start Condition: Ext Trigger (Rise), Stop Condition: Ext Trigger (Rise)
6
Ext Trigger Input
Rec Start Recording Period Rec Stop

Start Condition: Ext Trigger (Rise), Stop Condition: Ext Trigger (Fall) 7
Ext Trigger Input
Rec Start Recording Period

Rec Stop 8
No. of Recordings
If the recording stop condition is set to Recording Time, Ext Trigger (Rise) or Ext Trigger
(Fall) set the repeat count. For details, see section 5.1. 9

10
5.1.

Click the Start Recording button or choose Start Recording from the Acquisition menu. 11
The SL1000 will be ready to record, and it will start recording if the recording start
condition is met.
Start Recording button 12

Note App
If triggers occur consecutively at intervals less than or equal to 1 s, the SL1000 may not be able
to keep up with the recording operation, and a buffer overrun may occur.
Index
IM 720120-61E 5-11
5.5 Recording in Triggered Mode
This section explains how to record data if the measuring mode is set to Triggered Mode.
You must set the measuring mode to Triggered Mode on the Measurement Settings
screen in advance.
For details on the trigger settings, see section 4.8.
Acquisition menu.


(see section 5.1)

Auto Recording

5.1.
The three-digit number that is added to the end of a file name when data is recorded in
Free Run mode is not added in Triggered mode.
5-12 IM 720120-61E
5.5 Recording in Triggered Mode
Starting the Recording 1

Click the Start Recording button or choose Start Recording from the Acquisition menu.
The SL1000 will be ready to record. The SL1000 starts recording if a trigger occurs in
this state.
2

3
ACQ Start Measurement in progress ACQ Stop
Measurement state Rec Start Rec Stop 4

Recordable
Records the data Records the data
Record state over the measuring time over the measuring time
5
Trigger condition met Trigger condition met

Data can be recorded for the trigger count specified in the trigger settings.
If a trigger delay or pre-trigger is specified, the recording starts according to those 6
settings. For details on the trigger delay and pre-trigger settings, see section 4.8.
Note
• If triggers occur consecutively at intervals less than or equal to 1 s when the trigger mode is
set to Single (N) and the trigger count is set to infinite, the SL1000 may not be able to keep
7
up with the recording operation, and a buffer overrun may occur.
• When recording in Triggered mode, the number of points recorded is 0.1% greater than the
number of measured points that is specified in the measurement conditions. For example, if
the number of measured points is set to 10,000, the number of points recorded is 10,010.
8
Manual Trigger
Manual trigger allows you to start recording from any point. 9
Click the Start Monitoring button or the Start Recording button so that the SL1000 is
ready to measure or record.
Click the Manual Trigger button or choose Manual Trigger from the Acquisition menu.
A trigger is generated when you click the Manual Trigger button or choose Manual 10
Trigger from the Acquisition menu.
Manual Trigger button

11
12

App
Index
IM 720120-61E 5-13
5.6 Recording to Divided Files
The measured data being recorded can be saved to divided files.
1. Click the Divide Recording button or choose Divide Recording from the
Acquisition menu.
The file containing recorded measurement data is divided when you click the
Divide Recording button.

Divide Recording button

After division, Recording will continue using the same conditions as before.
Note
You cannot record to divided files during synchronous operation.
Name
If auto naming is set to Numbering, the sequence number is incremented by one.
If auto naming is set to Date, the file name is set to the date/time when the Divide
Recording button was clicked.
For details on file names, see section 5.1.
5-14 IM 720120-61E
Chapter 6 Display
6.1 Setting the Display Conditions 1
The Acquisition Software can display the measured waveforms of channels registered to
display groups. There are settings that apply to all display groups and settings that apply 2
to individual channels.
Setting Display Groups
1. Click the Display Settings button or choose Display Settings from the Acquisition 3
menu.
Display the Acquisition menu Display Setting button

4
The Display Settings screen opens.

Set the display range (for Free Run mode)
Display group tab Select the display group to be shown
5
Graph settings
(line width, time axis unit, etc.)
Apply the settings to the displayed waveform
6
Set the channels to display
Display
7
Set the display conditions for each channel
Move to the Recording Settings screen 9
Copy and paste settings for each channel Apply the settings and close the screen 10
Select the channel to be registered in a display group Display the waveform screen
Click this box and select from a list of displayed labels
Graph Settings
11
Turn ON/OFF the alarm level display (for Free Run mode)
Select the waveform line width 12

Turn ON/OFF the mark that indicates the most
recent data (for Free Run mode)
Select the horizontal (time) axis App

Set the time axis scaling
(if the time axis unit is set to Points)
Set the horizontal (time) axis unit
Set the scaling factor Index
Select the waveform display interpolation format
IM 720120-61E 6-1
6.1 Setting the Display Conditions
Setting the Display Range (for Free Run mode)

To measure in Free Run mode, you must set the X-axis range to be displayed. Set the
range in terms of the display time (internal clock) or the number of displayed points.
The maximum sample rate among the channels registered to the display group is
displayed on the setting screen.
In Triggered mode, all the measured data are displayed.
Setting the Display Time (When Measuring Using the Internal Clock)
Set the display range of the X-axis in the following range.
Longest sample interval × 10 to M/fastest sample rate
Longest sample interval: The longest sample interval among measuring groups 1 to 4.
M: 16000000 (2 channels), 8000000(3 to 4 channels)
4000000 (5 to 8 channels), 2000000 (9 to 16 channels)
Maximum sample rate: The maximum sample rate among measuring groups 1 to 4
The resolution is equal to the longest sample interval × 10. However, if the number of
displayed points (display time × maximum sample rate) exceeds 400000 points and
channels measuring with sample rates greater than or equal to 10 MS/s are registered in
the display group, the resolution is equal to the time corresponding to 400000 points.
You cannot set this value when the SL1000 is measuring using an external clock.
Setting the Number of Displayed Points

Set the display range of the X-axis in terms of the number of data points.
Graph Settings
Set the following items.
Line Width
Set the waveform line width to Thin, Medium, or Thick.
Alarm Level (Free Run Mode)
Set whether to display the alarm level of the channel alarm.
Current Mark (Free Run Mode)
Set whether to display the mark that indicates the most recent measured data.
Time Axis Unit
Set whether to display the time axis in absolute time, relative time from the start of the
measurement, or using the number of displayed points.
Time Axis Scaling (When the Time Axis Unit Is Set to Points)
Set whether to scale the time axis display. If scaling the display, set the factor per
displayed point as well as the display unit. Set the factor in the range of 0.001 to 1000.
Set the display unit using up to 10 characters.
Interpolation
Set the interpolation format used to connect sampled data points for displaying the
waveform.
Line: Interpolates between two points using a straight line.
Sine: Interpolates between two points using the sin x/x function.
Pulse: Interpolates between two points in a staircase pattern.
Dot: Does not perform interpolation.
Line Sine Pulse Dot
6-2 IM 720120-61E
Registering the Displayed Channels 1

Clicking a label box shows a list of labels of the measuring channels that are registered
to measuring groups. Select any measuring channel. The label list shows the label
names specified in the measurement settings. You can register up to 16 measurement
channels (up to 128 channels when eight units are linked for synchronous operation). 2
The same measuring channel can also be registered to multiple display groups.
To not register a measuring channel, select None from the label list.
By default, a display group will contain the labels that are registered to the measuring
group of the same number.
3
Selecting the Labels to Display
Click Select Labels to Display to show a list of labels for the measurement channels that
are registered to a measuring group. You can select any measurement channels from 4
the list of labels that appears. You can also collectively turn all channels on or off. If the
display group already contains measurement channels, the channels in the group are
changed to those specified here.
5
6
Select the channels to display
Display
Displays the channels using labels
8
If the maximum sample rate among the registered measuring channels is 50 MS/s,
9
5 MS/s, 500 kS/s, 50 kS/s, 5 kS/s, 500 S/s, or 50 S/s, a measuring channel with the next
lower sample rate cannot be registered to the same display group. For example, if the
maximum sample rate among the registered measuring channels is 500 kS/s in a display 10
group, a measuring channel with a sample rate of 200 kS/s (the next lower sample rate)
cannot be registered to that group.
Note 11
The sample rate can be specified at the measuring group level. Up to four measuring groups
can be set up.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-3
Setting Each Channel

Turn ON/OFF the waveform display
Turn the axis display ON/OFF
Turn ON/OFF the scale (display range) setting (measuring range if OFF)
Set the minimum value of the scale
Set the maximum value of the scale
Automatically set the scale
Set the minimum value of the zone (display position)
Set the maximum value of the zone (display position)
Set the waveform color

Auto button
Scroll bar
Set the numeric display format
Set the number of decimal places of
the numeric display
Turn the current value display ON/OFF
Set the display style of the
current values
Scroll bar
Turning ON/OFF the Waveform Display and Axis Display

Set whether to show or hide the waveforms and coordinate axes of channels registered
to display groups.
Setting the Scale

Set the scale (display range of the vertical axis).
Turning the Scale ON/OFF
Select the On check box to set the scale. If the check box is not selected, the measuring
range becomes the display range.
Minimum and Maximum Values of the Scale
Can be set when the scale is ON. The selectable range is –1E+30 to 1E+30.
Automatically Setting the Scale
Click the Auto button to automatically set to the scale best suited to the measured data.
6-4 IM 720120-61E
Setting Zones 1
Set the zones (display positions). You can display waveforms so that they don’t overlap
or move the waveforms to positions that allow easy comparison.
The settings specified here are valid when waveforms are displayed using User Zone or
Edit Zone on the waveform screen. For details on User Zone and Edit Zone, see section 2
6.2.
Minimum and Maximum Values of Zones
Set the minimum and maximum values of zones as a percentage of the vertical span of
3
the waveform screen.
Note
You can also set zones easily by using buttons on the waveform screen. For details, see
section 6.2. 4
Setting the Waveform Color

Clicking a color box opens a color setting screen. You can set any color.
5
Display

8
Setting the Display Format
Set the numeric display format.
Numeric Format
Select Floating, Exp, Hex, or Auto.
9
Decimal Places
Set the number of decimal places.
10
Current Value
Current values can be displayed at the same time as waveforms.
Turning the Display ON/OFF
Turn ON/OFF the current value display. 11
CV Type
Set the display style of current values to Digital, Meter, Bar, or Thermometer.
12

App
Digital Analog meter Bar graph Thermometer

Index
IM 720120-61E 6-5
6.2 Operating the Screen
Displaying the Waveform Screen

Clicking OK on the Display Settings screen in section 6.1 shows the waveform screens
of display groups whose Graph Display check box is selected.
To show a waveform screen that is not shown, click the corresponding display group
button on the toolbar.
Display group button

Select the active waveform display
Waveform screen screen or display the waveform screen
Display Updating
When measurement is started, the waveforms of channels registered to display groups
are shown.
If measuring in Triggered mode, waveforms are displayed when a trigger occurs.
You can stop and resume the display updating by clicking the Display Hold and Display
Resume buttons, respectively. You can read measured values using cursors and view
past waveform data while the display is held.
Display hold (holds the waveform display)

Start monitoring
Stop monitoring Hold release (resume screen updating)

Note
• The data continues to be acquired to the internal memory of the SL1000 even if the display
is held.
• When the display is held, the displayed data may be overwritten, because the SL1000
continues to measure data during this period. If this happens, the display hold feature will be
automatically released.
• When displaying data measured at sample rates greater than or equal to 10 MS/s, the
Acquisition Software may not be able to display the waveforms of all channels, depending
on the number of displayed groups, the number of channels, the PC performance, and
the CPU load on the PC. If this happens, the message “Failed to display some channels
because of the higher sample rate.” appears.
Lower the CPU load by lowering the sample rate, decreasing the number of displayed
channels, and so on.
• The display update may slow down during auto recording, because the recording operation
takes precedence.
6-6 IM 720120-61E
Operating Waveform Screens 1

Display the cursor values
Display the waveform parameter values
Display the GO/NO-GO judgment result
Display the numeric value
display area
Display the current values 2
X-Y Display (Version 2.10 or later)
Display all scales
Full screen display
Change the zone
Accumulate (Version 2.10 or later)
Trigger position Snapshot (Version 2.10 or later)
Acquisition
count
Clear accumulation or snapshots
Auto Play (Version 2.10 or later)
3
Expand or reduce Take a waveform screen capture
the waveform (take a screen snapshot)
(see section 6.3) Clear the SL1000 memory
4
6
Trigger level
Display
Show/hide the zone bar display area (click here)
Turn the waveform display ON/OFF (click here)
Invert the background color of the waveform display area (slide the knob) 7
Adjust the brightness of the scale in the waveform display area (slide the knob)
Zone bar
Changing the Display Scale on the Screen 8

You can change the display scale on the screen while measurement is in progress or
when measurement is stopped. Place the cursor over the scale on the screen so that the
icon appears. Right-click to display the scale adjustment tool buttons, or double-click
to display the scale setting screen. 9
Right-click
10
Auto scale
Increase the scale
Decrease the scale
Shift the waveform up Label
11
Shift the waveform down Execute auto scale
Display the scale setting screen Set the scale values
Enter the maximum and
minimum values numerically 12
Double-click
Label App
Execute auto scale
Set the scale values
Enter the maximum and minimum values numerically
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-7
Displaying Multiple Display Groups

If displaying waveforms of multiple display groups, you can cascade the windows of each
display group or tile them.
From the Window menu, choose Cascade, Tile Horizontally, or Tile Vertically. The
Window menu appears when a waveform screen is displayed.
Arranging Minimized Waveform Screens

To arrange the minimized waveform screens, choose Arrange Icons from the Window
menu.
Changing the Zones

To display waveforms using zones that have been specified in the display settings, click
the User Zone button, or choose User Zone from the View menu.
To change the zones specified in the display settings, click the Edit Zone button, or
choose Edit Zone from the View menu, and drag the top and bottom edges of the bars
vertically.
The zones that you change using Edit Zone are applied to the zones in the display
settings.
Click the Full Zone button to display all waveforms in a full zone (0 to 100%). Click the
Slide Zone button to display the slid waveforms. Click the Auto Zone button, or choose
Auto Zone from the View menu to display all waveforms so that they do not overlap. If
Full Zone, Slide Zone, or Auto Zone is selected, the display settings are not affected.
View Menu
Auto Zone button

Slide Zone button
Full zone button
For edit zone
Edit Zone button
Assign Zone button
Drag this to
change the zone
6-8 IM 720120-61E
Displaying All Waveforms Overlapped 1

To display all scales, click the Multi Zone button, or choose Multi Zone from the View
menu.
2

Multi Zone button
Selecting the Active Waveform 3

Click the bar of the waveform to be activated. A triangular mark is displayed above
the bar, and the waveform is activated. The displayed scale is the scale of the active
waveform.
4
Active waveform mark
Displaying the Current Values 5

Click the Current Value button while the display is being updated. The current values are
displayed.
If the measuring mode is Free Run, the channel alarm status is also displayed.
6
Display
Current Value button
7
Channel alarm status
(Free Run mode)
Black : Alarm not set
Green: Alarm not occurring 8
Red: Alarm occurring
Numeric display
Digital Analog meter Bar graph Thermometer
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-9
Displaying Channel Settings, Cursor Values, and Measured Waveform

Parameter Values
To show the area that displays channel settings, cursor values, and measured waveform
parameter values, click the numeric value display button, or choose Measure Value >
Numeric Values from the View menu.
To temporarily hide the display areas, click shown below. The Channel Info. and
Numeric Values tabs appear at the right of the display frame. Place the pointer over
these words to display the corresponding display area. If you move the pointer outside
the display area, the display area closes.
If you click Channel Info. or Numeric Values when the display area is hidden, the display
area remains shown even when you move the pointer outside the display area. If you
click a location outside the display area, the display area becomes hidden.To switch
between cursor values and measured waveform parameters when the numeric value
display area is shown, click the Cursor Display button or Measure display button, or
choose Cursor Display or Measure display from the View menu.
View menu
Numeric value display button Click to hide the display area

Cursor button Measure display button Close the numeric value display area
Numeric value
display area
The numeric value display area is hidden. Click to keep the numeric value
display area showing (The icon changes to )
Point or click Numeric Values
Point or click an area outside

the numeric value display area
6-10 IM 720120-61E
Changing the Size of the Screen 1

Move the pointer over the screen frame and drag when the pointer changes to an arrow.
To resize the screen to full screen click the Full Screen button on the toolbar. Clicking the
Full Screen button again when the screen is displayed in full screen causes the screen to
return to its original size. 2

Full screen button 3
Displaying Past Data

When the display is held or measurement is stopped, you can display past data stored in
the SL1000 memory by changing the waveform display position.
4
Moving the scroll bar of a waveform screen changes the position of the displayed
waveform and displays the past waveform. Move the scroll bar to the left to view older
data and to the right to view newer data. 5
In Free Run mode, you can go back as far as the oldest data stored in the SL1000
memory.
In Triggered mode, you can view history data up to the last 5000 waveforms by specifying
the waveform number (acquisition number). 6
Change the display position Specify the waveform number
Display
using the scroll bar (acquisition number) to view past data
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-11
Scrolling Automatically (Version 2.10 and later)

When measurement is stopped, the SL1000 can scroll the waveform display position
automatically.
Click the Auto Play button, or choose Auto Play > Auto Play from the View menu.
The auto play screen appears.
View menu
Show or hide the auto play screen

Display the oldest data
Play data towards older data
Play data towards more recent data

Display the most recent data
Set the play speed
Select the play source (in triggered mode)

History data: History waveform
Zoom cursor: Zoom position
Go to beginning Reverse Stop Play Go to end

Triggered mode Auto Play button Free Run mode
Set the play speed Play source settings
6-12 IM 720120-61E
Clearing the SL1000 Memory (in Triggered mode) 1

You can clear past measured data that is remaining in the SL1000 memory. Click the
unit’s memory clear button or choose Clear Unit Memory from the Acquisition menu.
Acquisition menu Clear button

2
Note 6
• History data refers to measured data that is acquired each time the trigger condition is met
Display
when measuring in Triggered mode. Up to the most recent 5000 data waveforms can be
saved.
• If past measured data is overwritten while the display is held, the display hold feature will be 7
automatically released.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-13
6.3 Expanding and Reducing Waveforms
The displayed waveforms can be expanded or reduced.
Triggered Mode
Click the Zoom View button on the waveform screen, or choose Zoom > Zoom View
from the View menu to display main waveforms and zoom waveforms in separate
waveform display areas. The main waveform display area displays the zoom cursor, and
the zoom waveform display area displays the zoom waveforms obtained by expanding
the waveforms within the zoom cursor. Click the button again to only display the zoom
waveforms. Click the button yet another time to only display the original main waveforms.
When zoom waveforms are displayed, if you click the Zoom Up or Zoom Down button or
choose Zoom Up or Zoom Down from the View menu, the zoom cursor width changes,
and the zoom waveforms are expanded or reduced.
The selectable zoom rates vary depending on the number of measured points. You
can move the zoom position by dragging the left or right edge of the zoom cursor or by
dragging the zoomed waveform directly.
Main waveforms
View menu Zoom up Zoom down Zoom view button
Main
Zoom cursor Zoom rate

Main waveforms + zoom waveforms (move zoom position by dragging)
Main Main
waveforms
Zoomed
waveforms Zoom
Move zoom position by Zoom rate

Zoom waveforms dragging zoom waveforms
Zoom
Zoom rate
6-14 IM 720120-61E
6.3 Expanding and Reducing Waveforms
Free Run Mode 1

To expand or reduce waveforms along the time axis, click Zoom Up or Zoom Down on
the waveform display screen, or choose Zoom Up or Zoom Down from the View menu.
View menu Zoom up Zoom down
2
Display points 5
Zoom up Zoom down
Display
7
8
Expand waveforms along the time axis Display points Reduce waveforms along the time axis Display points
Note 9
You can use the mouse wheel to increase and decrease the Triggered mode zoom factor or the
Free Run mode display time.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-15
6.4 Displaying the Measured Data That Has Been
Saved (Excluding the /XV0 Option)
Measured data that has been saved can be displayed. This function is not available on
models with the /XV0 option.
From the File menu, choose Load Waveform.
Select the data to be displayed.
The extension to measured data files is .wdf.
The measured data that has been saved is displayed using Xviewer, a software provided
with the SL1000. Carrying out the procedure above automatically starts Xviewer.
For details on the Xviewer operation, see the user’s manual.
Note
• You can install Xviewer when you install this software.
• For the procedure to save the measured data, see section 8.1.
• Xviewer can only display 2 G samplings of a measured data file containing more than 2 G
samplings of data per channel.
6-16 IM 720120-61E
6.5 Starting Xviewer (Excluding the /XV0 Option) 1
Use the accompanying software, Xviewer, to display measured data that has been saved
or to perform computations on the measured data (/XV1 option). 2
From the Utility menu, choose Start Xviewer.
For details on the Xviewer operation, see the 701992 Xviewer User’s Manual.
Note 4
• If you open a saved measured data by choosing Open from the File menu or if you double-
click a file containing operation information, Xviewer will automatically start.
• You cannot simultaneously connect to a single SL1000 using the Ethernet and USB
interfaces. Therefore, you cannot use Xviewer to connect to an SL1000 that is connected to 5
this software via the USB interface. (Xviewer is available on all models except those with the
/XV0 option.)
Display
7
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-17
6.6 Displaying the Alarm Log (Free Run Mode)
You can view a list of alarms that occurred in the past.
This function is valid in Free Run mode.
From the View menu, choose Alarm Log.
The alarm log appears.

The alarms that occurred are displayed according to the alarm conditions that you
specified before starting measurement (see section 4.9).
Displays “Alarm” while the alarm is occurring and “Release” when the alarm is released.
Unit number on which the alarm occurred
Channel number on which the alarm occurred
Pattern on which the alarm occurred
Measured value when the alarm occurred
Date and time when the alarm occurred
Date and time when the alarm was released
Close the alarm log
Display the waveform for Delete the selected alarm log

the selected alarm position
Alarm Log during Synchronous Operation

Units on which alarms occurred
Channels on which alarms occurred The time on the master unit (Unit0)
6-18 IM 720120-61E
6.6 Displaying the Alarm Log (Free Run Mode)
Analysis 1
If you click Analyze or double-click an alarm when the corresponding channel’s waveform
is displayed, the waveform position where the alarm occurred will appear. If a cursor is
displayed, the cursor will move to the alarm occurrence position.
This command is valid when the SL1000 is not measuring. 2
Selected alarm
4
Display
7
Selected alarm occurrence position 8

Note
• Up to 2000 alarm logs can be displayed. If more than 2000 alarms occur, the log is deleted
in order from the oldest one.
• The alarm log is reset each time you start measurement.
9
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-19
6.7 Accumulating Waveforms and Displaying
Snapshots
You can use the accumulation display to accumulate waveforms and use snapshots to
retain waveforms on the screen.
Accumulate
After you start measurement, click the Accumulate button, or choose Accumulate from
the View menu.
The most recent waveform is accumulated over the existing waveforms, which are not
erased from the display.
To stop accumulation, click the Accumulate button again, or choose Accumulate from the
View menu.
View menu Accumulate button Clear button
Clearing Accumulated Waveforms

Click the Clear button to clear the accumulated waveforms.
Note
• If you click the Accumulate button and then automatically display waveforms from memory,
you can accumulate past waveforms.
• You cannot adjust the window size while accumulated waveforms are displayed.
• If you change the waveform display area (for example, by turning the numeric value display
on or off) while accumulated waveforms are displayed, all accumulated waveforms will be
cleared.
Snapshot
After you start measurement, click the Snapshot button, or choose Snapshot from the
View menu.
The waveform that was displayed at the time that you clicked the Snapshot button is
retained on the screen.
View menu Snapshot button
6-20 IM 720120-61E
6.7 Accumulating Waveforms and Displaying Snapshots
Clearing the Previous Snapshot 1

To clear a snapshot, click the arrow on the right of the Snapshot button, and choose
Undo.
The most recent snapshot is cleared.
View menu
2
Clear the previous snapshot

Set the snapshot waveform color
5
Menu display
Clear button
6
Display
Clear the previous snapshot 7
Set the snapshot waveform color
Changing the Snapshot Waveform Color

To change the snapshot waveform color, click the arrow on the right of the Snapshot 8
button, and choose Settings. Specify the color on the snapshot settings screen that
appears.
Clearing Snapshot Waveforms 9

Click the Clear button to clear all of the displayed snapshot waveforms.
Note 10
• You cannot adjust the window size while snapshot waveforms are displayed.
• If you change the waveform display area (for example, by turning the numeric value display
on or off) while snapshot waveforms are displayed, all snapshot waveforms will be cleared.
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-21
6.8 Setting Marks
You can set marks at specific locations on a waveform screen.
You can only set marks in Free Run mode and when the clock source is set to internal.
You can also edit, delete, and display a list of the set marks. Additionally, if you record
measured data that has marks set in it or save such data to file, the mark information is
also saved. If you use Xviewer to display the waveform, the marks are also displayed.
Xviewer is included with all models, with the exception of /XV0 models.
Setting Marks
While the Display is Updating
After you start measurement in Free Run mode, click the Mark button. A dialog box
appears. Type the string that you want the mark to display, and click OK.
The mark is set at the position where you clicked the Mark button at.
Mark Mark button Mark setting screen
Type the string that you want the mark to display
Note
• There is a feature (described later) on the mark setting screen that allows you to set a mark
without opening the dialog box. If a mark is set without opening the dialog box when you
click the Mark button, this feature is enabled.
• If you move the pointer over a mark, the marked time (point) information appears.
While the Display is Stopped or Held

While the SL1000 is displaying waveforms, click the top of the waveform display area
at the position where you want to set a mark. The above dialog box appears. Type the
string that you want the mark to display, and click OK.
6-22 IM 720120-61E
6.8 Setting Marks
Setting Marks without Opening the Dialog Box and Setting the Mark Color 1
Click the arrow on the right of the Mark button. The mark setting screen appears.
Select the mark color 2

Select this check box to set marks
without opening the dialog box
3
Note
• Recorded data does not reflect any edits to the marks that are done after you record the
data. Edits include setting marks, changing existing marks, and deleting existing marks. To
save such edited data, save the measured data from the file menu.
• You can enter up to 16 characters for the string that you want the mark to display.
4
• You can set up to 128 marks.
Editing Marks 5
Double-click the mark that you want to edit. The mark editing screen appears.
You can also display the mark editing screen by right-clicking the mark that you want to
edit and choosing Edit.
6
Deleting Marks
Display
To delete a mark, right-click the mark, and choose Delete.
7
Displaying a List of Marks
You can display a list of the marks set for the currently displayed waveform by using one
of the following methods.
• Click the arrow on the right of the Mark button, and choose Mark List.
8
• Choose Mark List from the View menu.
• Right-click a mark, and choose Mark List.
If you double-click a mark on the mark list, the waveform at the position of the specified
9
mark is displayed.
10

11
Note
The information displayed on the mark list depends on the time axis unit setting in the display
12
condition settings.
When the time axis unit is Relative, the relative time and the number of data points are
displayed. When the time axis unit is Absolute, the absolute time and the number of data points
are displayed. When the time axis unit is Points, only the number of data points is displayed.
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-23
6.9 Displaying X-Y Waveforms
You can display X-Y waveforms that have a channel assigned to the X-axis, and
channels from the same measuring group assigned to the Y-axis.
Displaying X-Y Waveforms
Click the X-Y button, or choose X-Y from the View menu. The X-Y waveforms appear in
a different window.
The range of the X-Y display is either the range of the normal waveform display (T-Y
display) or the range of the zoomed waveform.
View menu X-Y button
X-Y Display

Select the number of data points to draw
Select the source for the X-Y display
Snapshot
Display cursors Clear button
Accumulate Display the measured results
Setting the Auto play
X-axis channel Take a waveform screen capture
6-24 IM 720120-61E
6.9 Displaying X-Y Waveforms
Maximum Number of Data Points to Draw 1

You can set the maximum number of data points to draw to 2K (2,000), 10K (10,000), or
100K (100,000). If the number of measured data points is less than the specified number
of data points to draw, the SL1000 uses all the measured data that is within the source
range to draw the waveform. If the number of measured data points is greater than the 2
specified number of data points to draw, the method used to draw the waveform differs
according to the measuring mode.
In Triggered Mode
The SL1000 draws the waveform by reducing the number of data points to the
3
specified number. This reduction is done by taking the midpoint of the maximum and
minimum values of multiple measured data points that are acquired over a set period
of time. 4
In Free Run Mode
The SL1000 draws the waveform with as much of the most recent measured data as
is specified by the number of data points to draw.
5
Drawing Area (in Triggered mode)
Main: The display range of the normal T-Y waveform is used as the display source.
Zoom: The zoomed range is used as the display source.
6
Cursor Display
Display
You can display cursors on top of X-Y waveforms, but you cannot move these cursors.
To move the cursors, move the corresponding T-Y waveform cursors. 7
Note
• As with normal T-Y waveforms, you can perform the following operations on X-Y waveforms.
Perform cursor measurements, take snapshots, accumulate waveforms, display measured 8
values, save screen captures, and automatically display waveforms from memory.
• In Triggered mode, even if the number of measured data points is greater than the number
of data points to draw, the value from the acquired measured data is used when displaying
cursor measurements or measured values. 9
• When displaying data measured in Triggered mode on the X-Y display, if the number
of measured data points is greater than the number of data points to draw, the SL1000
displays the waveform by taking the midpoint of maximum and minimum values of the
measured data points. When taking cursor measurements, the cursors may be displayed off 10
of the X-Y waveform because the cursors are displayed according to the measured data.
• The channels assigned to the Y-axis are channels that are in the same measuring group as
the channel assigned to the X-axis and their waveform display is set to ON in their display
condition settings. If you do not want to display a waveform, set its waveform display to OFF 11
or move the waveform to a different display group.
• If there are too many waveforms or too many data points drawn on the X-Y display, the
waveform display updating and waveform recording may slow down.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 6-25
Chapter 7 Analysis
7.1 Reading Measured Values Using Cursors 1
When a waveform is displayed, you can use cursors to read measured values.
Selecting the Cursor 2
There are two types of cursors: vertical and horizontal.
1. Click the arrow on the right of the Cursor button.
Select the cursor type from the displayed list. 3
Cursor button Click here
Displaying the Cursors

2. Click the Cursor button to display the cursors. 5
To display cursor values, click the Numeric Value Display button.
The cursor values are displayed to the right of the waveform screen.
Vertical Cursors
6
Cursor display button Data number and time at the Cursor A position
Cursor A (solid line) Data number and time at the Cursor B position
Numeric value display
Cursor B (dotted line) Difference between cursors A and B
button
Hide the numeric value 7
display area
Close the numeric value
Analysis
display area
Channel alarm ON 8
Channel alarm status of 9

cursors A and B
Red: Alarm occurring
Green: Alarm not occurring
Zone bar Difference between cursors A and B
Measured data at the Cursor B position 10
Measured data at the Cursor A position
Horizontal Cursors
Scale value at the Cursor A position
Cursor A (solid line) Scale value at the Cursor B position 11
Difference between cursors A and B
12
App
Cursor B (dotted line) Index
IM 720120-61E 7-1
7.1 Reading Measured Values Using Cursors
Zoomed Waveform Cursors in Triggered Mode

Normal (main) waveform
Zoomed waveform cursors Zoomed waveform
Note
To temporarily hide the numeric value display area, click the mark. The numeric value
display area closes and the words “Numeric Values” appear on the display frame. Moving the
pointer over these words displays the numeric value display area. At this point the mark is
changed to .
If you click , the icon changes to , tabs for switching between display areas appear at the
bottom of the display area, and the selected display area remains displayed.
Moving the Cursors

Move the cursor by dragging it. The cursor moves on the measured points. If you double-
click on the waveform display, cursors A and B will move to 25% and 75% positions on
the horizontal axis, respectively.
Pressing the left and right arrow keys on your PC keyboard moves the cursor over the
measured data one point at a time. This feature is useful if multiple data points exist
within the time corresponding to a dot on the display, such as when measurement is
performed at a fast sample rate.
If data measured at different sample rates is displayed in the same waveform screen, the
cursor moves at the measured data interval of the active waveform. Be sure to activate a
waveform when reading measured values from it using cursors. The active waveform is
indicated by a triangular mark that is displayed above the zone bar.
For a zoomed waveform in Triggered mode, if a cursor is displayed at the zoom position,
the cursor will also appear on the zoomed waveform. The normal waveform cursor and
zoomed waveform cursor move concurrently. If you double-click on the zoom display,
cursors A and B will move to 25% and 75% positions on the horizontal axis in the zoom
display, respectively.
Notes on Cursor Measurements

• If waveforms measured in different measuring groups are displayed in the same
display group, waveforms with different sample rates will be displayed on a single
screen. If you are measuring these waveforms using vertical cursors, the cursor
values of the waveform that does not have a measured point at the cursor position will
be displayed using the measured value at the closest cursor position.
• Data cannot be acquired if measurement is performed at a sample rate that exceeds
the maximum sample rate of a module. When the data cannot be acquired, it is set to
the same value as the previously acquired data. Therefore, the measured value may
not change even if you move the vertical cursor.
• If waveforms are displayed using Auto zone (see section 6.2), horizontal cursors
cannot be used.
7-2 IM 720120-61E
7.2 Computing Waveform Parameters (Triggered 1
Mode)
This section explains how to automatically compute 26 types of waveform parameters
2
and display the computed results.
This function is available when the measuring mode is set to Triggered Mode.
Selecting the Waveform Parameters to Be Computed
The waveform parameters selected here will be computed. 3
1. Click the Measure Settings button on the toolbar or choose Measure Settings
from the Acquisition menu.
A screen for setting the waveform parameters to be computed is displayed. 4
Measure Settings button
Analysis
8
Check the waveform parameters to be computed
Set the target channel for the distal,

mesial, and proximal lines 9
Unit used to set the distal, mesial,
and proximal lines
Set the distal line
10
Set the mesial line
Set the proximal line
Set High or Low mode
11
12
Select the channels* for computing
the selected waveform parameters
Cancel the settings and close the screen App

* You can select up to 128 channels when eight units are linked for synchronous operation.
Index
IM 720120-61E 7-3
7.2 Computing Waveform Parameters (Triggered Mode)
Parameter Detail Settings

Specify settings related to the distal, mesial, and proximal lines as well as high and low
levels for each channel.
Dist/Mesial/Prox Mode
Select the method of assigning the three levels that are used as references in
measurements such as the rise and fall times.
%
Assuming the high and low levels of a channel to be 100.0% and 0.0%, respectively,
set the desired distal, mesial, and proximal values as percentages.
Selecting the High/Low Assignment Method (High/Low Mode)
High indicates the 100% level in measurements such as the rise or fall time, and Low
indicates the 0% level. Select how the high and low levels are assigned from the
following two methods.
Auto
The higher amplitude level is set to high and the lower level is set to low based on
the frequency of occurrence of waveform voltage levels within the measuring range,
taking into account the effects of ringing and spikes. This method is best-suited for
measuring rectangular waveforms and pulse waveforms.
MAX-MIN
Sets High to the maximum value of the measuring range, and sets Low to the
minimum value. This method is best-suited for measuring sine waveforms, ramp
waveforms, etc. It is not suited for measuring waveforms with ringing and spikes.
Computed Parameters
The following waveform parameters are computed.
Voltage Axis Parameters
P-P: P-P value (Max–Min) [V] Under shoot: (Low–Min)/(High–Low)×100 [%]
(Peak to peak value)* Over shoot: (Max–High)/(High–Low)×100 [%]
Max: Maximum voltage [V] High: High voltage [V]
(Maximum)* Low: Low voltage [V]
Min: Minimum voltage [V] Amplitude: (High–Low) [V]
(Minimum)* Middle: (Max+Min)/2
1
RMS: RMS value
n
{(Σ(xi)2}1/2 [V]
1
Average: Average voltage n Σxi [V]
Standard deviation:
Σxi2 Σxi
{ n – ( n )2}1/2 [V]
* The characters inside the parentheses are measurement item names used when displaying the measured values.
Max High
Over shoot
P-P
Under shoot
Low
Min
7-4 IM 720120-61E
Time Axis Parameters 1

Avg Period: Average period within the measuring range [s]*
Rise: Rise time [s] +Width: Time width above the mesial value [s]
Fall: Fall time [s] (Plus width)*
Freq: Frequency [Hz] 1/Period –Width: Time width below the mesial value [s]
Period: Period [s] (Minus width)* 2
Avg Freq: Average frequency within the Duty: Duty cycle + Width/Period × 100[%]
measuring range [Hz]*
* The characters inside the parentheses are measurement
Period item names used when displaying the measured values.
+Width –Width 3
High (100%)
Distal line (90%)
Mesial line (50%)

4
Proximal line (10%)
Low (0%)
Rise Fall
Pulse count 5
For Pulse = 3
Distal line (90%)
Mesial line (50%) 6

Proximal line (10%)
Measuring
T1 range T2
Burst1, Burst2: Burst width [s] 7
Analysis
Distal line (90%)

Mesial line (50%)
8
Proximal line (10%)
Burst2
Burst1
T1
Measuring
range T2
9
Other Parameters
Int1TY: The area of the positive amplitude
10
Int2TY: The area of the positive amplitude – the area of the negative amplitude
Int1TY Int2TY
Total area for positive side only: S1 + S2 Total area for both positive and
negative sides: S1 + S3 – S2
11
S2 S1 S3
S1
S2
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 7-5
Setting the Computing Range

On the waveform screen of display group 1, click the Measure Display button. Cursors
for setting the computing range appear.
The range between the cursors is the computing range. Drag the cursors to set the
computing range.
Measured values at Difference between
Measure display button Cursors the cursor positions cursors A and B
Waveform parameters Measured values of

waveform parameters
The data number and time at the cursor positions are displayed in the cursor value
display area.
Note
• Computation is not performed on channels whose measured points in the computing range
exceed 10 M.
• Waveform parameter values are displayed only on the waveform screen of display group 1.
The Measure Display button is disabled on the waveform screens of display groups other
than display group 1.
Selecting the Computed Results to be Displayed

On the waveform display screen of display group 1, click the arrow next to the Measure
display button. A dialog box used to select the computed results to be displayed and
display format appears.
Measure display button Click here
Select the check box to display the computed

results by arranging the channels vertically

Display the computed results in unit of the

specified number of rows

7-6 IM 720120-61E
Displaying Computed Results 1

When measurement is started, the waveform parameter values in the numeric value
display area in the waveform screen of display group 1 are updated.
If the waveform parameter values are not displayed, click the Measure Display button
in the waveform screen of display group 1. The waveform parameter values will be 2
displayed.
Measure display button
3
5
Drag the frame to change the
ratio of the waveform display Displayed in unit of the specified
number of rows
area to the numeric value
display area (Example when set to 3 rows) 6
If the channels are arranged vertically
Analysis
8
Note 9
• Waveform parameter values are displayed only in the waveform screen of display group 1.
• If the P-P value on the waveform parameter source channel is less than 5% of the range,
time axis waveform parameters cannot be computed.
• Computation on time-related waveform parameters (rise time, fall time, period, plus width,
minus width, Burst1, and Burst2) may not be possible if the sample rate is too low for the
10
target waveform. If this is the case, “sampling interval value>” will appear for the computed
result.
• When the display is held, waveform parameter computation is not performed, and “***”
appears.
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 7-7
Chapter 8 Saving and Loading Data
8.1 Saving and Loading Measured Data 1
The auto recording function explained in chapter 5 records measured data to a specified
hard disk automatically as soon as measurement and recording are started. This chapter 2
explains how to save measured data that has already been acquired to any location and
how to display the measured data that has been saved.
Saving Measured Data 3
With measurement stopped, choose Save Waveform from the File menu.
Specify the destination and file name. The measured data is saved in .wdf format
File Format
YOKOGAWA waveform file: The extension is .wdf. You can display the waveform in 4
Xviewer.
ASCII file: The extension is .csv. The data is saved in comma-separated, ASCII
format. This applies to versions 2.10 and later.
Binary file: The extension is .bin. The data is saved in floating-point format. You can 5
load the file into data analysis software such as MATLAB. This applies to
versions 2.10 and later.
Select the file format 8
Saving and Loading Data

Set the range to save
Set the unit to use when setting the 9
range to save (when you select to
manually specify the range)
Set the range to save (when you
select to manually specify the
When setting the range to save using relative time range) 10
11
When setting the range to save using absolute time
12
When saving a file in ASCII format

Select whether or not to divide files App
Select whether or not to
add time axis information
Set the division unit to use when
dividing files Index
Select whether or not to add header
information
Select whether or not to interpolate
data with different sample rates
IM 720120-61E 8-1
8.1 Saving and Loading Measured Data
The Range to Save (Version 2.10 and later)

You can set the range to save.
All: In Free Run mode, the SL1000 saves all the measured data that is stored
in the SL1000 unit's internal memory. In Triggered mode, the SL1000
saves the measured data that is displayed at the time that you save the
data.
Display: The SL1000 saves the measured data that is in the displayed range. You
can select this option when the SL1000 is in Free Run mode.
Zoom Display: The SL1000 saves the measured data that is in the zoomed range. You
can select this option when the SL1000 is in Triggered mode.
Cursor: The SL1000 saves the measured data that is between the cursors. You
can select this option when cursors are displayed.
User: The SL1000 saves the measured data that is in the specified range. Set
the range of data to save using points or time.
Data points: Set the range of data to save using points. Specify the
range of data to save by specifying the start point and the
end point or the number of data points to save.
Absolute time: Set the range of data to save using date and time. Specify
the start time and the end time or the length of time.
Relative time: Set the range of data to save by specifying the relative
time from the start of measurement. Specify the start time
and the end time or the length of time.
When saving data to a file in ASCII format, you can include header or time-axis
information. You can also divide the file. These operations are the same as when you
convert files using the File Utility. For details, see section 10.6, “Converting Waveform
Data Files to CSV or Binary Files.”
In Free Run mode, measured data stored in the SL1000 memory is saved. In Triggered
mode, measured data shown on the display is saved.
Note
• If waveforms of different display groups are displayed in Triggered mode, the data of the
display group that is shown in the active window is saved.
• During synchronous operation, the SL1000 saves measured data to a file for each unit
whose channel is selected for recording. “0-” (the unit number and hyphen) is added in front
of the specified file name.
• When saving data in Triggered mode with the range to save set to All, the number of
points saved is 0.1% greater than the number of measured points that is specified in the
measurement conditions. For example, if the number of measured points is set to 10,000,
the number of points saved is 10,010.
When you save data under any other conditions, the number of measured points set in the
measurement conditions are saved.
• In version 2.10 and later, mark data is also saved to the text file. The file name is the same
as that of the measured data file.
• If you save data at different sample rates in Free Run mode, the maximum measuring time
given in appendix 2 may be exceeded on channels whose sample rate is set high.
In such cases, as much of the most recent data as is specified by the maximum measuring
time is saved.
Loading Measured Data

On the File menu, choose Open.
In the Open dialog box, select YOKOGAWA waveform file (*.wdf) for the Files of Type,
and specify the file you want to open.
Xviewer, a software appliocation provided with the SL1000, starts, and the waveform is
displayed.
For details on operating the Xviewer application, see the user’s manual.
Note
• Waveforms cannot be displayed on a PC without Xviewer installed. If you have a model
without Xviewer (/XV0 option), please purchase Xviewer separately.
• If you load a measured data file that contains mark data into Xviewer version 1.44 and later,
the marks will be displayed.
8-2 IM 720120-61E
8.2 Saving and Loading Setup Data 1
The settings of this software and the SL1000 can be saved to a file, and setup data
saved in the past can be loaded to change the settings. 2
Saving Setup Data
From the File menu, choose Save As or Save.
To save by specifying a name, set Save as type in the Save As dialog box to Setting Files 3
(*.sls) and specify the destination and file name.
6
Note
One setup file is created during synchronous operation as well.
Loading Setup Data 7

From the File menu, choose Open.
In the Open dialog box, select Setting Files (*.sls) in the Files of Type list, and specify the
file you want to open.
8
If the settings of the selected setup file differ from those of the connected SL1000
system, a message is displayed along with corrective actions that can be taken. Select

any of the corrective actions.
For details, see section 2.4. 9
The corrective actions and their descriptions are given below.
Corrective Action Description

Go system wizard.
(Display the previous
The software loads only the settings without connecting to the SL1000
and displays the Connection & Group Settings screen. You can change
10
settings in offline.) the settings, such as the measurement conditions, offline. Search for
SL1000s on the Connection & Group Settings screen. If an SL1000 is
found, the settings on the SL1000 are updated with the settings you
specified offline. However, updating is not possible if the connection and 11
group settings of the detected SL1000 and those specified offline are
different.
If the detected SL1000 is measuring or recording, the message “On
measuring (recording) Units are found” is displayed. Select Get settings
from the unit or Stop measuring and send settings to the unit. 12
Get settings from the unit. Discard the channel assignments to measuring groups or individual
channel settings that were loaded and receive the channel assignments
to measuring groups or individual channel settings from the SL1000.
The measurement or recording on the SL1000 continues.
Stop measuring and send If the SL1000 is measuring or recording, the settings cannot be updated. App
settings to the unit. Therefore, stop the measurement or recording and update the SL1000
settings using the settings of this software.
Index
IM 720120-61E 8-3
8.3 Saving the SL1000’s Data to Your PC
There are two ways to save the data of the SL1000. One is to save using the File menu.
The other is to use the FTP function.
Saving All the Waveform Data in the Internal Memory of the SL1000 to Your PC
From the File menu, choose Save Unit Memory Waveform.
Set the destination and file name.
All the measured data in the internal memory of the SL1000 are saved to the PC.
The measured data that is saved is the measured data from when the measurement
was started until the measurement was stopped in Free Run mode and the history data
measured in Triggered mode.
Note
• History data is the measured data that is acquired each time the trigger condition is met
after measurement is started in Triggered mode. The data of up to the most recent 5000
waveforms can be saved.
• When a measurement is started, previously acquired measured data is cleared.
8-4 IM 720120-61E
8.3 Saving the SL1000’s Data to Your PC
Saving Data Using FTP 1

You can save the data on the internal hard disk (option) of the SL1000 to your PC using
the FTP function.
This function is valid if the SL1000 is connected to your PC via the Ethernet interface
(option). 2
Your PC must also have an FTP client installed.
From the Environment menu, choose Communication Settings.

Set the FTP account. 3
Show the Environment menu

4
Select the group ID (0 to 9 and A to F)
(as necessary)
Unit ID of the unit to be configured (0 to 7) 5
(as necessary)
Enter the unit name (as necessary)
Enter the group name (as necessary)
8
Set the user name, password, and timeout value

9
Start an FTP client on your PC, type the IP address of the SL1000 you want to connect
to as well as the user name and password that you specified in the FTP account settings,
and connect to the SL1000 on the network.
10
Use your FTP client to download the desired files to your PC.
Note 11
You cannot connect both Ethernet and USB interfaces simultaneously to an SL1000. You
cannot connect to the SL1000 that this software is connected to via USB, using FTP.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 8-5
8.4 Saving Computed Data
This section explains how to save the computed results of waveform parameters that
were analyzed in chapter 7.
Saving Computed Data

When measurement is finished, choose Save Measured Value from the File menu. Set
Save as type in the Save As dialog box to ASCII Files (*.csv), and specify the destination
and file name. The computed data is saved to a text file in CSV format.
Example of a Computed Data File
Label Name
Waveform parameter
Date / Time
Note
• Computed data contains the computed results of waveform parameters that were enabled
at the start of measurement. It does not contain the results of computations that were
performed while measurement was stopped.
• Computed data is cleared if:
• You execute Clear Unit Memory.
• You add or delete source channels or waveform parameters to compute.
• During synchronous operation, one file that contains the computed data of all linked units is
saved.
8-6 IM 720120-61E
8.5 Saving Waveform Screen Captures 1
You can save screen captures of waveforms during measurement or after measurement 2
is stopped.
You can choose the command from the File menu or click the Snapshot button.
Saving Waveform Screen Captures 3

From the File menu, choose Save Image.
Set the file type to Bitmap Image (*.bmp) or PNG Image (*.png), and specify the
destination and file name.
4
Taking a Snapshot with the Snapshot Button

1. Click the arrow on the right of the Snapshot button. 7
Save Image button Click here

8
2. Set the file type to BMP or PNG, and specify the destination. The file will be

named automatically.
9

10
3. Click the Snapshot button.
Every time you click the Snapshot button from this point, the waveform screen 11
capture is saved to the specified destination.
File Name
12
When you take screen captures using the snapshot button, a file name that consists of
the display group number followed by a sequence number is automatically assigned to
the saved files. When the sequence number exceeds 99999, it returns to 00000, and old
data is overwritten. App
D1_00000
Sequence number(00000 to 99999)
Display group number(D1 to D4) Index
IM 720120-61E 8-7
8.6 Transferring Files between the SL1000s and
the PC
This section explains how to transfer files that have been recorded in synchronous
operation mode collectively to the PC or how to transfer files between one SL1000 and
the PC by specifying files and folders.
Using the File Transfer Function

Click the File Transfer button, or choose File Transfer from the File menu.
Show the File menu File Transfer button

The File Transfer screen appears in a separate window.
Sync. transfer mode (valid only during synchronous operation)

Single transfer mode
Upload
Download
Refresh with the Latest Data
Delete
Move to a higher-level folder
Create a folder Close the File Transfer screen

Download SL1000
You can also drag files to upload and download.
Upload PC
Sync. Transfer Mode

This mode is only valid in synchronous operation mode. The files of all linked units are
transferred collectively to the PC with a single operation.
Single Transfer Mode
Transfer files one unit at a time.
Upload
Transfers files from the PC to the SL1000.
Download
Transfers files from the SL1000 to the PC.
8-8 IM 720120-61E
8.6 Transferring Files between the SL1000s and the PC
How Files Appear and How They Are Transferred 1

In Sync. transfer mode, files and folders at the same absolute path in each linked unit’s
file system are consolidated and displayed under the appropriate group ID.
If a file exceeds 2 GB and is divided into multiple files using sequence numbers, the first
file with the name “0000_000.WDF” is displayed. A is shown on the icon of this file. 2
When you download a file that represents multiple files that have been consolidated, all
of the consolidated units’ files are transferred to the PC. The ID of the unit that contains
the files is added to the front of the names of the downloaded files. For example, if the 3
unit ID is zero, the file name is “0-0000.WDF” (“0-0000_000.WDF” if the file size exceeds
2 GB and the file is divided).
If the Auto File Merge (Synchronous Operation) check box under Start-up Options in 4
Environment Settings is selected, a link file that merges the downloaded files is created
in the same folder. The name of the link file is the same as that of the corresponding file
in the unit. However, if a file exceeds 2 GB, a sequence number is added, and the file
name is “0000_000.WDF.” 5
Consolidates all units that are operating in sync and displays its group ID
(If unit names are assigned, they are displayed in parentheses.)
The icon appears for a file that 6
represents a consolidation of multiple units’ files
The hard disk of all of
the units that are Total size of all consolidated IDs of all units that
operating in sync units’ files are included
7
8
Download SL1000

9
PC
10
11
Files that are downloaded collectively to the PC
Link file that is created when the consolidated files are downloaded
Files that are downloaded from the Unit 2 12
Files that are downloaded from the Unit 1
Files that are downloaded from the Unit 0
Note App
• You cannot delete, upload, or create a folder on the SL1000s while recording is in progress.
• You cannot download the file that is being recorded to.
• You cannot download files that have been automatically divided when a recording file size
exceeds 2 GB until the recording of all divided files is finished.
• In Sync. transfer mode, you cannot upload files from the PC to the SL1000s or create
Index
folders on the SL1000s.
IM 720120-61E 8-9
Chapter 9 Other Functions
9.1 Synchronizing the Clock with Your PC 1
You can synchronize the clock of the SL1000 to your PC’s clock.
This is effective when you want to make measurements by minimizing the time difference 2
between the measured data and the PC.
1. From the Environment menu, choose Environment Settings.
3
2. Select the Use PC Time Settings check box.

5
3. When you click the OK button, the SL1000 clock is synchronized to the PC’s
clock. From this point, the clock is synchronized every time you start
measurement.
6
Displays the date/time of SL1000
7
Select the check box to synchronize with
the date/time of your PC

8
Click OK
Changes to the date/time of your PC
when starting the measurement
Cancel the settings and close the screen 9
Other Functions
Note
The date/time on the SL1000 is set to the date/time in Japan by factory default.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 9-1
9.2 Automatically Merging Recorded Files (Only
during synchronous operation)
This section explains how to automatically create a link file that virtually merges (see
section 10.3 for details) recording files of all units operating in sync.
1. From the Environment Menu, choose Environment Settings.
2. Select the Auto File Merge (Synchronous Operation) check box.

3. Click OK.
When the recording destination is

set to PC HDD, select the check box
to automatically create a link file
that virtually merges during
Click OK
Changes to the date/time of your PC
when starting the measurement
Auto File Merging

This setting is valid when the recording destination is set to PC HDD. This function
automatically creates a link file that virtually merges the files of all units operating in sync.
For example, if three SL1000s are operated in sync, the following files are created on
each unit: 0_0000.wdf, 1_0000.wdf, and 2_0000.wdf. At this point, a link file named 0000.
wdf that virtually merges these files is automatically created.
Auto file merging is enabled by factory default.
Note
• When the Auto File Merge check box is selected, a link file that virtually merges files is also
created when you:
• Choose Save Waveform from the File menu.
• Execute sync transfer using the file transfer function (see section 8.6 for details).
• If the auto recording destination is set to PC HDD in Free Run mode and you select the
Auto File Merge check box, the possibility of recording buffer overrun to occur increases
depending on the recording conditions. In these cases, you may be able to avoid recording
buffer overrun by clearing the Auto File Merge check box.
9-2 IM 720120-61E
9.3 Setting the Software Start-up Options and Exit 1
Options
Set the operation of this software when it is started or closed.
2
1. From the Environment menu, choose Environment Settings.
4
Set the start-up options and exit options.
Set the start-up options 5
Set the exit options
Cancel the settings and close the screen 6

Start-up Options 7
Select from the following:
Previous Settings: Starts the software with the settings that were used when the
software was closed the last time.This option is useful if you want
to make measurements using the same system configuration as 8
the last time.
Start Monitoring: Starts measuring as soon as this software is started.
Start Recording: Starts measuring and recording as soon as this software is
started. 9
Note
Other Functions
• If you start the software with the Previous Settings check box selected and the system
configuration and the settings of the setup file are different, a message and corrective action
are displayed as shown below.The message and corrective action vary depending on the
10
conditions.For details, see section 2.4.
Message
11
Corrective action
• If you select the Start Monitoring check box and the measuring mode at start-up is Triggered
mode, the SL1000 will be in the trigger-wait state immediately upon starting the software. 12
• If you select the Start Recording check box and a recording start condition is specified, the
software will start recording when the recording start condition is met after the software
starts.
App
Exit Options
Select either of the following:
End ACQ: |hen this software is closed, SL1000 will also stop measuring.If the
SL1000 is measuring, the confirmation message “Stop Measurement?”
Index
is displayed.
Continue ACQ: The SL1000 will continue measuring even when this software is closed.
To stop the measurement on the SL1000, press the START/STOP key
on the SL1000.
IM 720120-61E 9-3
9.4 Performing a Self-Test
This section explains how to self-test the SL1000. You can self-test each unit during
Connect to the SL1000 that will be self-tested in the Connection & Group Settings screen
in advance.
1. From the Environment menu, choose Self Test.
Select the unit ID of the unit to perform the self-test on
Set the SL1000 to key test mode

Clear the SL1000 key test mode
Execute the test
Displays the test result

PASS
FAIL
Format the internal hard disk
of the SL1000
CPU temperature of the SL1000
Note
You cannot execute a self-test while the SL1000 is measuring.
Unit Keyboard Test

Pressing the Test Exec button sets the SL1000 to panel key test mode.Then, execute a
key test on the SL1000.
Pressing the Test End button clears the panel key test mode.
Other self-tests cannot be executed while the keyboard test is in progress.
ACQ Mem. Test, System Mem. Test, Backup Mem. Test, and Internal HDD Test
For each SL1000, the self-test is performed on all memory types and the optional internal
hard disk.
9-4 IM 720120-61E
9.4 Performing a Self-Test
Internal HDD Format (/HD1 Option) 1

The internal hard disk of the SL1000 performs a logical format.
CAUTION 2
If you format the internal hard disk, all the data on the hard disk will be lost.Copy
the necessary data to your PC using the file tranfer function, FTP (/C10 option)
or Xviewer (all models except /XV0). For details on the file transfer function, see
section 8.4. For details on the FTP function, see section 8.3. For information about
3
Xviewer, see the user’s manual.
4
CPU Temperature
Measures and displays the CPU temperature of the SL1000.
Other Functions
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 9-5
9.5 Display the SL1000 Information
For each SL1000 unit ID, the version and information about the measurement modules
installed in the SL1000 can be displayed.
Connect to the SL1000 that you want to view the information about in the Connection &
Group Settings screen in advance.
1. From the Environment menu, choose Self Test.
2. Click the Unit Info. tab.

Unit Info. tab
Select the unit ID of the unit to display information for
SL1000 firmware version

SL1000 hardware (FPGA)
version
Model and version of the
measurement modules that
are installed
SL1000 serial number
9-6 IM 720120-61E
9.6 Displaying the SL1000 System Information 1
This section explains how to display the measurement, recording, channel, alarm, and
other settings of the SL1000 (multiple SL1000s during synchronous operation) that you 2
are connected to.
1. From the Environment menu, choose Unit System Information.
3
System Information Example 5
Unit ID0 (UID0) module

Unit ID1 (UID1) module
7

9
Displays the measurement channels of all SL1000s (up to 128 channels)
Other Functions
during synchronous operation
The SL1000 system information that is displayed can be saved to a text file. 10
Click the Save button and specify the destination and file name.
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 9-7
9.7 Locking the Keys on the SL1000
The panel keys of the connected SL1000 can be locked.
1. From the Environment menu, choose Unit Key-Lock.
If the keys are locked, a check mark appears in front of Unit Key-Lock, and the
following icon is displayed on the SL1000.
2. To clear the key-lock, choose Unit Key-Lock from the Environment menu again.
You can also clear the key-lock by holding down the DISPLAY key on the SL1000
until the icon disappears.
9-8 IM 720120-61E
9.8 Initializing the SL1000 Settings 1
The settings of the connected SL1000 can be initialized.

1. From the Environment menu, choose Initialize. 2
4
Click the Execute button to initialize the settings of the connected SL1000.
To cancel initialization, click Undo with the Initialize screen open.
5
Close without initializing

Close the screen
6
Execute initialization
7
Note
• If you close the Initialize screen, you will not be able to undo it.
• If you execute initialization, the SL1000 will return to factory default settings. However, the
following items will not be initialized. 8
• Various environment options
• The connection method (USB/Ethernet) and unit search settings in Connection & Group
Settings
• Ethernet settings (IP address and FTP account settings) 9
• Unit name and group name
• If you execute initialization, measuring group registrations of measurement modules will also
Other Functions
be initialized. After initialization, register the measurement modules to measuring groups
again in the Connection & Group Settings screen. 10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 9-9
9.9 Calibrating the SL1000
You can calibrate the connected SL1000 or set the auto calibration.
1. From the Environment menu, choose Calibration.
To execute calibration, click the Execute button.

To set the auto calibration, select ON or OFF.
If ON is selected, calibration is executed automatically when the SL1000 is started.
Turn ON/OFF auto calibration

Close the screen
Execute calibration
Note
• You cannot execute calibration while the SL1000 is measuring.
• You cannot configure auto calibration during synchronous operation.
9-10 IM 720120-61E
9.10 Specifying Communication Settings on 1
SL1000s on the Network (Option)
To configure communication settings, connect to the SL1000 via USB. You can configure
2
communication settings on multiple SL1000s by using a USB hub.
1. From the Environment menu, choose Communication Settings.The
Communication Settings screen appears.
3
If the error “Cannot find the appropriate unit” is displayed, click OK.The Communication 5
Settings screen will appear. Check that the SL1000 is connected properly via USB and
click Reconnect in the Communication Settings screen.
Set the group ID and unit address of the network-connected SL1000 that you want to set.
6
Type the unit name, group name, IP address, and FTP account as necessary, and click
the Apply button.The settings are applied to the specified SL1000.
Select the group ID (0 to 9 and A to F)

7
Unit ID of the SL1000 to be configured (0 to 7)
Enter the unit name (up to 32 characters)

Enter the group name (up to 32 characters) 8
Turn DHCP ON or OFF
You are done with the IP address settings
if you turn DHCP ON
Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway 9

Other Functions
10
Set these items to access the SL1000 hard disk
from your PC using FTP
11
Reconnect Button Apply Button

12
To configure another SL1000’s communication settings, leave the Communication
Settings screen open, and switch the USB connection to the SL1000 unit that you
specified using the group ID and unit ID. Then, click Reconnect. You will be able to
specify communication settings on the reconnected SL1000. App
Note
• You cannot specify communication settings while the SL1000 is measuring.
• When applying communication settings, the connection is temporarily disconnected. Click Index
Reconnect to connect to the specified unit.
• If you click OK after applying the communication settings, the connection is disconnected.
To begin taking measurements, connect to the unit from the System Configuration screen.
IM 720120-61E 9-11
9.11 Displaying the Operating Status, Showing
and Hiding the Toolbar and Status Bar, and
Undocking the Menu Bar and Toolbar
This section explains how to show and hide various buttons, the status bar, and the
operating status. It also explains how to undock the toolbar and the operating status
display area from the window.
1. From the View menu, click Standard (toolbar), Status Bar, or Operating
Information to place a check mark by the item you want to show.
Items with a check mark are shown.
To hide an item, click again to clear the check mark.
Toolbar
(Standard)
Toolbar
(Operation)
Click to hide the

operating information
Operating information
(Information)
Status bar Drag or double-click the title to show operating

information in an undocked dialog box
Menu Bar, Toolbar (Standard), and Toolbar (Operation)

Drag the menu bar or a toolbar to show the contents in an undocked dialog box. Drag
it back to its original position to dock it to the window.You can change the shape of
undocked dialog boxes by dragging their boundary or corner.
Undocked bars Reshaped, undocked

toolbar (operation)
Drag to change shape

Operating Information
Drag or double-click the title to show the contents in an undocked dialog box. After
undocking, if you double-click the title again, the dialog box is docked to the window at its
original location.
If you click to hide the entire area, the Operating Information tab appears in the status
bar. Click here to show the operating information again. Click to fix the dialog box in
place.
9-12 IM 720120-61E
9.12 Displaying the Software Version 1
Displaying the SL1000 Acquisition Software Version 2

1. Click the button, or choose About SL1000 from the Help menu to display the
SL1000 Acquisition Software version information.
Version information of SL1000 Acquisition software

4
5
SL1000 Acquisition Software version information
2. Click OK to close the dialog box.
6
Displaying the SL1000 File Utility Version
1. From the Help menu, choose About SL1000 File Utility to display the SL1000 File
Utility version information.
7
Version information of SL1000 File utility

8
9
SL1000 File Utility version information
Other Functions
2. Click OK to close the dialog box.
10
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 9-13
Chapter 10 File Operation
10.1 Starting and Exiting the File Utility 1
The file utility allows you to process waveform data files that have been recorded using 2
the SL1000 (in .wdf format) so that you can analyze the data smoothly on Xviewer.
Starting the File Utility

From the SL1000 Acquisition Software’s Utility menu, choose File Utility. You can also 3
double-click the SL1000 File Utility icon on the desktop.
The SL1000 File Utility starts.
Starting from the SL1000 Acquisition Software
4
5
Using the SL1000 File Utility icon
6
SL1000 File Utility
10
File Operation
Exiting the File Utility
From the SL1000 File Utility’s File menu, choose Exit. 11

12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-1
10.2 Common Operations
In the File Utility, the file list refers to the list of files that are going to be processed. This
section explains the common file list operations that you carry out when you merge files,
divide files, accelerate the waveform display, and convert files to CSV.
Selecting the Source Files

Follow the procedure below to display the SL1000 waveform data files (with .wdf
extension) that you want to manipulate, in the file list.
1. From the File menu, choose Browse, or click Browse by Input Files.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. Select the files that you want to manipulate, and click Open.
The selected files appear in the file list.
File list
10-2 IM 720120-61E
Note 1
You can also add files to the file list by dragging the appropriate files from a folder to the file list.
Dragging 4
6
Updating Files
Follow the procedure below to update the files that are registered to the file list with the
most recent information.
1. Choose Update Information from the View menu, or click Update by Input Files. 7
10
File Operation
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-3
Displaying File Properties

Follow the procedure below to select the items you want to display in the file list. The
selected items appear in the file merging, file division, waveform display acceleration,
and CSV conversion file lists.
1. From the View menu, choose Select Rows to open the Select Rows dialog box.
2. Select the check boxes for the items that you want to display, and click OK.
The selected items appear in the file list.
Select the check boxes for the items

you want to display in the file list.
The selected items

appear in the file list.
File List Properties

Item Description
File Name Displays the names of the files that you are going to manipulate without
the .wdf extension.
Model Name Displays the model name (SL1000).
Group ID Displays the group ID of the SL1000 that recorded the file in the range of
0 to F.
Unit ID Displays the unit ID of the SL1000 that recorded the file in the range of 0
to 7.
Measuring Mode Displays the file’s measuring mode (Free Run or Triggered).
Maximum Sample Displays the file’s maximum sample rate. If a file contains data that has
Rate been sampled using different sample rates, the fastest sample rate is
displayed. If data has been measured using an external clock, the word
“External” appears.
Measuring Time Displays the file’s measuring time in 10-ms steps.
Triggered Time If the file contains data that has been saved in Triggered mode, the
time when the SL1000 was triggered is displayed in 10-ms steps. The
triggered time does not appear when data is measured in Free Run
mode.
Recording Start Time Displays the file’s recording start time in 10-ms steps. This is the
recording time of the file’s first data value. The recording start time is not
displayed if the data has been measured in Triggered mode using an
external clock.
Recording End Time Displays the file’s recording end time in 10-ms steps. This is the recording
time of the file’s last data value. The recording end time is not displayed if
the data has been measured using an external clock.
10-4 IM 720120-61E
Item Description 1
Record Length Displays the number of data points in the file (the record length per
channel). If the file contains data sampled at different sample rates
using the SL1000 measuring group feature, the number of points at the
maximum sample rate is displayed.
Waveform Display Displays whether or not display data is included in the waveform data file. 2
Acceleration If display data is included, “Done” appears. Otherwise, “Undone” appears.
Selecting the Files to Manipulate 3

From the source files in the file list, select the files that you actually want to manipulate.
You can select one file to manipulate by clicking the file you want, or you can select
multiple files to manipulate collectively by using the Shift or Ctrl key. 4
When One file Is Selected
6

When Multiple Files Are Selected
8
Note
For file merging, all of the files in the file list are merged; you do not have to select the files that
you want to manipulate.
9
10
File Operation
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-5
Sorting the File List

You can sort the files in the file list.
You can select files in the file list and drag them to the appropriate position. Then, the
files are resorted.
Select a file and drag it to the appropriate position.
The file moves to the specified position.
Note
You cannot sort the files if the file merging mode is set to Time Series.
10-6 IM 720120-61E
Deleting Files from the File List 1

Follow the procedure below to delete selected files from the file list.
1. Select the files that you want to delete on the file list, and click Cancel, or press
the Delete key.
2
To delete all files from the file list, click All Cancel.
Deletes all files
Deletes the selected files 6
7
2. Click Yes to delete the selected files from the file list.
10

File Operation
11
Deletes the selected files
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-7
10.3 Merging Files
1. Click the File Merge tab.

Select the file merge mode
Merge file creation mode

Time Series: Real file merge
Channel: Link file merge
Merges files in the file list

in order from top to bottom
Set the output file name

Execute file merging
Displays the output file if you specify it
Selecting the Files to Merge

2. Select the files that you want to merge according to the procedure explained in
section 10.2.
Selecting the Merge Mode and Creation Mode

3. Set the merge mode to Time Series or Channel.
The creation mode is fixed to Real File Merge when the merge mode is set to
Time Series and to Link File Merge when the merge mode is set to Channel.
To set the output file name, proceed to step 4. Otherwise, proceed to step 6.
Setting the Output File Name

4. Click Browse to open the Save As dialog box.
Select the folder
Enter the file name
5. Set the save destination and file name, and then click OK.
The dialog box closes.
Executing File Merging

6. Click Execute to merge files.
10-8 IM 720120-61E
10.3 Merging Files
File Merging 1
The file utility allows you to merge files over time or over channels.
Merging Files over Time

In file merging over time, the file utility merges waveform data files* that have been 2
stored with no time spacing between the files. These files are stored on a single SL1000.
File merging over time actually merges the files.
* Waveform data files that have been stored through time divided recording (with
3
recording interval set to off)
Real File Merging

Physically concatenates waveform data files that have been stored through time divided
recording (with recording interval set to off) and creates a single waveform data file. 4
Real File Merging
Time divided recording (with recording interval set to off)
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
5
Waveform
data file 1
Waveform
data file 2
Waveform
data file 3
Waveform
data file 4
Waveform
data file 5
Waveform
data file 6
6
Waveform data
Real merging of 7
waveform data files
real merge file over time
Note 8
• By merging files over time, you can use Xviewer to perform long-term waveform analysis.
• Files cannot be merged that would cause the number of data samples per channel to
exceed 2 G samples.
• If the sample rate is 5 S/s, you can merge files when the time spacing between each file is
less than 400 ms. At other sample rates, you can merge files when the time spacing is less
9
than 200 ms.
10
File Operation
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-9
10.3 Merging Files
Merging Files over Channels

This feature merges waveform data files that have been stored on the SL1000s running
in sync operation (up to eight units). File merging over channels merges files virtually
using a link file.
Link File Merging

Virtually concatenates waveform data files that have been stored through time divided
recording (with recording interval set to off) to create a single link file.
Simultaneous measurement on multiple units
Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 - 6 Unit 7
Trigger
Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 7

Waveform Waveform Waveform Waveform
data file data file data file data file
Units 0 to 7 Link merging of waveform data files

waveform data that have been measured
link files simultaneously on multiple units
Note
• By merging files over channels, you can use Xviewer to simultaneously analyze multiple
channels across multiple units.
• Files that have been merged through linking cannot be remerged, divided, accelerated for
waveform displaying, or converted to CSV files.
File Merging
Files in the file list are merged in order from top to bottom.
Number of Files That Can Be Merged

The maximum number of files that can be merged is 128.
Merge Mode
• Time Series
Select this option to merge waveform data files over time without any time space in
between data files. When the merge mode is set to Time Series, the creation mode is
set to Real File Merge. Only files that have been recorded in Free Run mode on the
SL1000 can be merged.
• Channel
Select this option to merge waveform data files that have been saved on multiple units
using synchronous operation. When the merge mode is set to Channel, the creation
mode is set to Link File Merge.
Creation Mode
• Real File Merge
In this mode, waveform data files are physically merged to create a single file. This
mode is used when the merge mode is set to Time Series. The original files remain
when real file merging is performed.
10-10 IM 720120-61E
10.3 Merging Files
• Link File Merge 1

In this mode, a link file that contains information about how files are merged is
created. Waveform data files are not physically merged. This mode is used when the
merge mode is set to Channel.
2
Output File Name
• When you set the output file name
A file with the specified name is saved to the specified folder.
When merging files over time, “_000” is appended to the specified file name. If the file
3
size exceeds 2 GB as a result of merging, the output files are divided into 2-GB files
and saved with the following sequence numbers attached after the specified file name:
_000, _001, _002, and so on. 4
Example: Set the output file name to “TEST”
When the file size is less than 2 GB: “TEST_000.wdf”
When the file size exceeds 2 GB: “TEST_000.wdf”
“TEST_001.wdf” 5
“TEST_002.wdf”
:
• When you do not set the output file name
Files are saved according to the following rules in the folder that contains the first file. 6
If the merged file size exceeds 2 GB, files are divided in the same manner as when
you set the output file name.
1) When the first file to be merged is the first file among the automatically divided
files in Free Run mode with the name “****_000.wdf,” the character “m” is inserted 7
before the last four characters “_000.”
“0000_000.wdf”+”0001_000.wdf”→“0000m_000.wdf”
2) For all other cases, the character “m” is added to the end of the first file name or
before “_000.”
8
“TEST1.wdf”+“TEST2.wdf”+“TEST3.wdf”→“TEST1m.wdf” (Channel)
“TEST1.wdf”+“TEST2.wdf”+“TEST3.wdf”→“TEST1m_000.wdf” (Time Series)
3) If the merge mode is set to Channel and the file names start with characters 9
that represent the unit ID “*-” (a number from 0 to 7 and a hyphen), the first two
characters are deleted. Then, the file name is determined according to rules 1 and
2 above.
“0-0000.wdf”+“1-0000.wdf”+“2-0000.wdf”→“0000m.wdf” 10
File Operation
Conditions Necessary for Merging Files
Merging files over time
• Data files must be from the same group and the same unit.
11
• Data files must have been measured in Free Run mode using the internal clock.
• Data files must contain data sampled at the same maximum sample rate.
• Data files must be continuous in time (there must be no time spacing between 12
subsequent files’ data).
Merging files over channels

• Data files must be of the same measurement mode (measurement files in Free Run
mode and those of Triggered modes cannot be mixed).
App
• Data files that were saved using an external clock must have been measured in
Triggered mode.
• Data files must contain data with different unit IDs. Index
• Data files must contain data with the same group ID.
• The maximum sample rates must be the same.
• Data files must contain data with the same recording start time (in Free Run mode) or
with the same trigger time (in Triggered mode). Any time errors must be within 1 ms.
IM 720120-61E 10-11
10.4 Dividing Files
1. Click the File Divide tab.

Select the file division mode
Select the start position
Set the record length unit and value
Select the file division unit
Valid when the start position

is set to Time
Displays the number of files
that would result (as a reference)
Set the output folder

Execute the file division operation
Displays the output folder if you specify it
Valid when the start position

is set to No. of Points
Selecting the Files to Divide

2. Select the files that you want to divide according to the procedure explained in
section 10.2.
Selecting the File Division Mode and Division Unit

3. Set Divide Mode to Equal Division or Clipping.
4. Set Divide Unit to Time or No. of Points.
If you select Time, proceed to step 5. Otherwise, proceed to step 8.
Selecting the File Division Start Position

5. Set First Data to First Data, Timed (if Time was selected in step 4), or No. of
Points (if No. of Points was selected in step 4). If you select First Data, proceed
to step 7. If you select Timed or No. of Points, proceed to step 6.
Setting the Start Time or the Number of Points for Dividing Files
6. Set the file division start time (if Time was selected in step 4) or the number of
points for dividing files (if No. of Points was selected in step 4).
10-12 IM 720120-61E
10.4 Dividing Files
Setting the File Division Record Length 1

7. Set the record length unit to Day, Hour, Minute, or Second (if Time was selected
in step 4) or Points (if No. of Points was selected in step 4). Then, set the record
length.
2
To set the output file name, proceed to step 8. Otherwise, proceed to step 10.
Setting the Output Folder

8. Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog box. 3
9. Select the save destination folder, and then click OK.

The dialog box closes.
7
Executing the File Division Operation
10. Click Execute to divide the files.
8
Note
If you select one file, that file is divided. If you select multiple files, the selected files are divided
based on the first file’s file division conditions.
9
10
File Operation
11
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-13
10.4 Dividing Files
File Division
This feature divides waveform data files in time. You can divide files evenly or extract a
portion of the file.
Equal Division
Divides the waveform data files from the specified start position into even sections based
on the specified record length. You can set the start position to the first data point, a
specific time, or a specific number of points. You can set the record length to a specific
time value or a specific number of points.
Long-term recording
Divides a waveform data file

Waveform data file into multiple files by time
or by the number of points
Divided Divided Divided

waveform waveform waveform
data file 1 data file 2 data file 3
Note
When files are divided evenly, waveform data of a given period can be analyzed quickly using
Xviewer.
Clipping
Extracts data from waveform data files from the specified start position for the specified
record length. You can set the start position to the first data point, a specific time, or a
specific number of points. You can set the record length to a specific time value or a
specific number of points.
Long-term recording
Waveform data file
Extracts a specific portion

Extracted of the waveform data
waveform
data file
Note
When a portion of a file is extracted, waveform data at a specific time period can be analyzed
quickly using Xviewer.
10-14 IM 720120-61E
10.4 Dividing Files
File Division Mode 1

• Equal Division
Divides a specified file into even-sized files.
• Clipping
Extracts a specific portion from a specified file to create a single file. 2
File Division Unit

• Time
3
Divides files by a specific time period. You cannot select files that have been recorded
using an external clock on the SL1000.
• Points
Divides files by the specified number of data points. 4
Start Position
• First Data
Starts dividing data from the first data point. 5
• Timed
If the file division unit is time, set the start date and time in the following formats:
YYYY/MM/DD and HH:MM:SS.
6
• No. of Points
If the file division unit is number of points, set the start point to a value from 1 to
1000000000.
7
Record Length
• Time
If the file division unit is time, set the record length to 1 to 2592000 (unit: day/hour/
minute/second). 8
• Points
If the file division unit is number of points, set the record length to a value from 0 to
100000000.
9
(No. of file divide)
Before the execution of the file division operation, this displays the number of files that
would result by dividing the first selected file in the file list using the conditions above as 10
reference .
File Operation
“---” is displayed when the first selected file cannot be divided using the specified
conditions.
11
Number of File Divisions
The maximum number of file division is 1000.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-15
10.4 Dividing Files

• When you specify the output folder
Files are saved to the specified folder according to the following rules. If the divided
file size exceeds 2 GB, files are divided into 2-GB files and saved with the following
sequence numbers attached after the file name: _000, _001, and so on.
1) When the file that you want to divide is the first file among the automatically divided
files in Free Run mode with the name “****_000.wdf,” a character string that
represents division sequence numbers from “[000]” to “[999]” is inserted before the
last four characters “_000.”
Example: When “0000_000.wdf” is divided into three files
• When the size of the divided files is less than 2 GB
“0000[000]_000.wdf”,“0000[001]_000.wdf”,“0000[002]_000.wdf”
• When the size of the divided files exceeds 2 GB
“0000[000]_000.wdf”,“0000[001]_000.wdf”,“0000[002]_000.wdf”
“0000[000]_001.wdf”,“0000[001]_001.wdf”,“0000[002]_001.wdf”
: : :
2) For all other cases, “_000” is appended to the first file name, and a character string
that represents division sequence numbers from “[000]” to “[999]” is inserted before
“_000.”
Example: When “TEST.wdf”is divided into three files
• When the size of the divided files is less than 2 GB
“TEST[000].wdf”,“TEST[001].wdf”,“TEST[002].wdf”
• When the size of the divided files exceeds 2 GB
“TEST[000]_000.wdf”,“TEST[001]_000.wdf”,“TEST[002]_000.wdf”
“TEST[000]_001.wdf”,“TEST[001]_001.wdf”,“TEST[002]_001.wdf”
: : :
• When you do not specify the output folder

Files are saved to the folder containing the file you want to divide by using the same
rules as when you specify the output folder. If the size of the divided files exceeds 2
GB, files are divided in the same manner as when you set the output folder name.
10-16 IM 720120-61E
10.5 Accelerating Waveform Displaying 1
1. Click the Waveform Display Acceleration tab. 2
3
Only files whose
Acceleration
indicates Undone
can be accelerated. 4
Execute waveform 6
display acceleration
Select this check box to overwrite the original file
with the waveform display accelerated file.
7
Selecting the Files That You Want to Accelerate Waveform Displaying For
2. Select the files that you want to accelerate waveform displaying for according to
the procedure explained in section 10.2.
8
Setting the Overwrite Condition
3. Use the Overwrite check box to select whether or not to overwrite the file.
9
Executing the Waveform Display Acceleration
4. Click Execute to accelerate waveform displaying.
Note 10
• If you select one file, that file is accelerated. If you select multiple files, the selected files are
File Operation
accelerated collectively.
• You can execute waveform display acceleration on files whose Acceleration indicates
Undone. If you attempt to execute waveform display acceleration on files whose 11
Acceleration indicates Done, an error message appears.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-17
10.5 Accelerating Waveform Displaying
Waveform Display Acceleration

Files that have been stored through time divided recording (with recording interval set to
off) on the SL1000 do not contain display data for accelerating waveform displaying on
Xviewer.
This feature adds waveform display acceleration data to waveform data files.
Time divided recording (with recording interval set to off)
Waveform Waveform Waveform Waveform

data file 1 data file 2 data file 3 data file 4
Adds display data used to accelerate

waveform displaying on Xviewer to
the waveform data files.
Display Waveform Display Waveform Display Waveform Display Waveform

data data 1 data data 2 data data 3 data data 4
Note
This allows waveform data files that have been stored through time divided recording to be
displayed quickly on XViewer.
Setting the Overwrite Condition

The waveform display accelerated files are saved to the following folders with the
following file names depending on the overwrite condition.
• When the Overwrite check box is selected
The waveform display accelerated file overwrites the original file in the specified folder.
• When the Overwrite check box is not selected
Creates an “Acceleration” folder in the folder that contains the specified files, and
saves waveform display accelerated files with the same names in the new folder.
10-18 IM 720120-61E
10.6 Converting Waveform Data Files to CSV or 1
Binary Files
1. Click the Format Conversion tab. 2
2. Set Format to csv or bin (binary).
Select whether or not to add time-axis information (for CSV conversions)
Select the format to convert to
Select whether or not to divide files (for CSV conversions) 3
Set the division unit to use when dividing files
4
Select whether or not to add header
information (for CSV conversions)
Select whether or not to interpolate
data with different sample rates (for
CSV conversions) 5
Select the output folder 7

Execute the format conversion operation
Displays the output folder if you specify it

8
Selecting the Files You Want to Convert
3. Select the files that you want to convert according to the procedure explained in
section 10.2.
9
This is the last step in the binary conversion process. Proceed to step 8.
Setting File Divisions, Time Axis Information, Header Information, and

Data Interpolation Used for Different Sample Rates (For CSV conversions) 10
4. Set File Divide to ON or OFF. If you set File Divide to ON, set the number of lines
File Operation
for the division unit.
5. Set Time Axis to Absolute, Relative, or OFF. 11
6. Set Header to ON or OFF.
7. Set Data Interpolation of Different Sample Rates to ON or OFF.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-19
10.6 Converting Waveform Data Files to CSV Files

8. Click Browse.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
7. Select the save destination folder, and then click OK.

The dialog box closes..
Executing the File Conversion Operation

8. Click Execute.
The waveform data files are converted to CSV or binary files.
Note
• If you select one file, that file is converted. If you select multiple files, the selected files are
converted according to the conditions of the first file.
• If you double-click a single file in the file list, Xviewer runs and displays the waveform that is
stored in the file that you double-clicked.
• If you move the pointer over a file name in the file list, the path information for the file
appears. If you move the pointer over the recording start time, the recording start time
information appears. If you move the pointer over the other attributes in the file list in the
same way, the respective attribute information for the file appears.
File Conversion
This feature converts waveform data files (.wdf extension) that have been saved on the
SL1000 to CSV (.csv extension) or binary (.bin extension) files.
WDF waveform
CSV or binary files
data files
Converts SL1000 WDF waveform data files to CSV or binary files.

Multiple files can be converted collectively.
Note
• By converting files to CSV files, you can reuse the measured results on text-based analysis
tools.
• By converting files to binary files, you can reuse the measured results on analysis tools such
as MATLAB.
10-20 IM 720120-61E
Time Axis Information (For CSV conversions) 1

Select whether or not to include time axis information in the converted CSV file.
• OFF
Does not include time axis information (only measured data).
• Absolute 2
Includes the measured time values (actual time values).
Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute:Second
Example: 2008/07/02 09:37:56.654321, 2008/07/02 09:37:56.654322,
2008/07/02 09:37:56.654323
3
• Relative
• Free Run mode
Includes relative time values based on the first data point. 4
Example: 0 (first data point), 0.000001, 0.000002
• Triggered mode
Includes relative time values based on the trigger position. Data points before the
trigger positions are indicated with negative values, and data points after the trigger 5
point are indicated with positive values.
Example: -0.00499984, 0 (trigger position), 0.00499984
Note 6
For data points measured using an external clock, data numbers, 0, 1, 2, and so on, are
assigned to both absolute and relative time values.
Header (For CSV conversions) 7

Select whether or not to include header information in the converted CSV file.
• ON: Includes header information.
• OFF: Does not include header information.
8
Header Information Items (For CSV conversions)
Items Description
Model Indicates the model name (SL1000).
BlockNumber Indicates the number of measurements. 9
• Free Run mode: Fixed at 1
• Triggered mode: Number of acquisitions (history count)
TraceName Indicates the SL1000 channel name.
BlockSize Indicates the number of measured points for the maximum sample rate.
Date Indicates the recording start date.* 10
Time Indicates the recording start time.*
File Operation
VUnit Indicates the vertical (voltage) axis unit.
HResolution Indicates the horizontal (time) axis resolution.
HUnit Indicates the horizontal (time) axis unit. 11
* The date and time of the first data sample for both Free Run and Triggered modes.
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 10-21
When absolute time is selected When relative time is selected
Header information
Time axis information (absolute time) Time axis information (relative time)
Interpolation Data with Different Sample Rates

When there are data points sampled at different sample rates, this setting selects
whether or not data points will be interpolated for data sampled at slower sample rates.
• ON
Unavailable data is filled by interpolating the data.
• OFF
Unavailable data is not filled by interpolating the data.
When data is not interpolated When data is interpolated
Actual number of Total number of sample

sampled points points after interpolation
Actual sample rate Matched to the fast

sample rate
(the actual sample rate
is 2.00E-06)
Leaves unavailable Filled with the

data points blank same data values

• When you specify the output folder
CSV files are saved to the specified folder.
• When you do not specify the output folder
CSV files are saved to the folder that contains the source files. File names are the
same as those of the source files. The extension is .csv.
“0000.wdf”→ “0000.csv”
10-22 IM 720120-61E
Chapter 11 Maintenance
11.1 Troubleshooting 1
Problem Probable Cause/Corrective Action 2

Unable to connect to the SL1000. • The USB or Ethernet cable may not be connected properly. Check the cable connection.
• If connecting over an Ethernet network, the specified IP address may be different from
the actual IP address of the SL1000. Check the IP address assigned to the SL1000 on
the SL1000 display.
• Connection cannot be established if the SL1000 is turned OFF. Turn SL1000 power
3
switch ON.
• The unit ID of the SL1000 may be set to values other than zero. Check the settings on
the SL1000.
• During synchronous operation, the group ID is not matched or unit IDs are overlapping. 4
Check the SL1000 group ID and unit ID.
Unable to set the external clock. The ACQ mode may be set to a mode other than Normal. Set the ACQ mode to Normal.
Unable to measure waveform The measuring mode may be set to Free Run. Use Triggered mode.
parameters.
Waveform parameters are not If “***” is shown in the waveform parameter display area, you may be trying to display a 5
displayed. waveform parameter that is not being measured.
Set the SL1000 to measure the parameters that you want displayed.
The waveform zoom cursor does The measuring mode may be set to Free Run. Use Triggered mode.
not appear.
Unable to set a channel alarm. The measuring mode may be set to Triggered. Use Free Run mode.
6
Some waveforms are not If the sample rate is set to 10 MS/s or higher and there are many displayed channels
displayed. (especially during synchronous operation), a portion of the channels may not be displayed.
A message indicates which channels are not displayed. To display those channels, lower
the CPU load by decreasing the number of displayed groups, decreasing the number of 7
displayed channels, lowering the sample rate, and so on.
10
11
Maintenance
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 11-1
11.2 Messages
SL1000 Unit Error Messages

Error Code Message Explanation/Corrective Action
52 Auto setup is in progress. Wait for a moment. —
53 Auto setup is complete. —
58 Undoing auto setup. Wait for a moment. —
59 Auto setup has been undone. —
66 Automatic strain balancing is in progress. Wait for a —
moment.
67 Automatic strain balancing is complete. —
69 Calibrating. Wait for a moment. —
70 Calibration is complete. —
74 Completed internal HDD format. —
78 Undoing initialization. Wait for a moment. —
79 Initialization has been undone. —
81 The total length of the synchronous connection cables Appears when the total sync cable length exceeds 10 m.
exceeds regulation length. Keep the total cable length less than 10 m.
88 Initializing. Wait for a moment. —
89 Initialization is complete. —
703 Unable to undo, because auto setup has not been Undo is used to undo an auto setup.
executed. It becomes available only after executing an auto setup.
713 Auto calibration failure. Check that CH[n] of Slot[n] is Check the input signal of the specified channel.
available.
724 Strain balancing failed. Check that CH[n] of Slot[n] is Check whether the specified channel is connected.
available.
777 Range—over occurred during shunt calibration. Check Increase the measuring range and execute the calibration
the input voltage or range settings. again.
806 Cannot change settings during GO/NO—GO. Stop Operate the SL1000 after GO/NO—GO judgment is
GO/NO—GO first. finished.
821 Cannot change trigger delay when external clock is Trigger delay is avaliable to change when internal clock is
active. active.
904 Buffer overrun occurred. It will take [n] seconds to The tendency for a buffer overrun to occur increases if the
finish recording the rest of the data. Abort recording sample rate is fast or the number of channels is large.
now? If you abort the recording, the data being recorded will be
lost.
905 Buffer overrun occurred on internal hard disk. It will The tendency for a buffer overrun to occur increases if the
take [n] seconds to finish recording the rest of the data. sample rate is fast or the number of channels is large.
Abort recording now? If you abort the recording, the data being recorded will be
lost.
906 Fan stopped. Measurement and recording will stop. Servicing is required.
Turn off the power immediately after recording is
complete.
913 The hard disk is full. Recording to the unit will be Delete unnecessary files from the recording destination
stopped. Delete unnecessary files or move files to your hard disk. There are two ways to delete files on the
PC to free up space. SL1000.
• Use FTP to delete the files if connected via an Ethernet
network.
• Connect to the SL1000 using Xviewer and delete files
through file manipulation.
941 Probe power is overloaded status. The maximum output current from the SL1000 probe
Pull the probe and check the consumption current. power supply (/P4 option) is 1300 mA. Check the current
consumption on the connected probe.
943 Synchronous connection cable came off. Appears when a sync error is detected during synchronous
operation, such as when a sync cable is disconnected.
Communication is disconnected when this error occurs.
Check the sync cable connections and reconnect.
1001 File access failure. Execute Internal HDD test from Unable to access the internal hard disk of the SL1000.
the Self Test screen. If the test fails, servicing will be If the self—test fails, servicing is required.
required.
1002 Invalid file name. Check the input characters. Check the file name.
11-2 IM 720120-61E
11.2 Messages
Error Code Message Explanation/Corrective Action 1

1003 File name exceeds the maximum number of characters Check the file name.
(256). Check the number of input characters.
1004 The file comments exceed the maximum number Check the file comments.
of characters (250). Check the number of input
characters. 2
1005 Out of disk space. Delete unnecessary files or move Delete unneeded files in the recording destination hard
files to your PC to free up space. disk (PC or SL1000).
There are two ways to delete files in the SL1000.
• Use FTP if the SL1000 is connected via the Ethernet
interface.
3
• Connect to the SL1000 using Xviewer and delete files
through file operation.
1117 Reached the maximum file size that can be stored. Displayed when the recorded data reaches the maximum
It will take [n] seconds to finish recording the rest of the savable file size (approx. 12 GB). Measurement also stops 4
data. Abort recording now? when this message is displayed.
Wait until the remaining data that has not been recorded is
recorded.
To cancel recording, click abort.
5
10
11
Maintenance
12
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 11-3
11.2 Messages
Acquisition Software Error Messages

Message Explanation/Corrective Action
Cannot find units. Appears if you start the SL1000 by specifying Previous Settings for
the start—up option and the SL1000 cannot be found. Check that:
• The SL1000 is connected.
• The SL1000 is turned ON.
Measurement in progress. Appears when an attempt is made to connect to an SL1000 that
is measuring. Press START/STOP on the SL1000 to stop the
measurement first.
The system configuration is different. Appears if you start the SL1000 by specifying Previous Settings for
the start—up option and the system configuration of the SL1000 is
different from the previous configuration.
Open the Connection & Group Settings wizard (Display the The software starts with the previous settings without connecting to
previous settings offline). the SL1000.
Go system wizard. (Display the loaded file settings in offline.) Changes to the settings of the loaded setup file without connecting
to the SL1000.
Get settings from the unit. The settings will be loaded from the SL1000.
Stop measurement? Appears if the exit option in the environment settings is set to End
ACQ and you close the software while the connected SL1000 is
measuring.
Redo Connection and Group Settings? Offline settings will be This message appears if you search for the SL1000 again while the
cleared. settings are displayed in offline mode and the system configuration
of the software differs from that of the SL1000.
The connected unit is being remotely controlled by another This message appears if another PC is connected to the detected
application. SL1000. Disconnect the other PC from the SL1000 first and then
Close the other application and connect to the SL1000 unit connect to the SL1000.
again. This message also appears if you try to connect to the SL1000
immediately after the software is terminated by force for some
reason. Wait for a few seconds and connect again.
No display data. Appears if there are no channels to be displayed in the current value
display.
Select a display channel.
Please set a sample rate less than the sample rate of group 1. Measuring groups other than measuring group 1 must be set to a
lower sample rate than measuring group 1.
Please set a sample interval greater than the sample interval Measuring groups other than measuring group 1 must be set to a
of group 1. longer sample interval than measuring group 1.
If the most significant digit of the sample rate of Group 1 is 5, If the sample rate of Measuring Group 1 is set to a value whose
the next fastest sample rate whose most significant digit is 2 most significant digit is 5 (such as 50 MS/s and 5 M/s), the next
cannot be selected. fastest sample rate whose most significant digit is 2 (such as 20 MS/
Select another sample rate or change the sample rate of s and 2 MS/s) cannot be specified.
Group 1. For example, if the sample rate of Measuring Group 1 is 500 kS/s,
the sample rate of other measuring groups cannot be set to 200 kS/s.
If the most significant digit of the sample interval of Group If the sample interval of Measuring Group 1 is set to a value whose
1 is 5, the next shortest sample rate whose most significant most significant digit is 2 (such as 20 ns and 200 ns), the next
digit is 2 cannot be selected. shortest interval whose most significant digit is 5 (such as 50 ns and
Select another sample interval or change the sample interval 500 ns) cannot be specified.
of Group 1. For example, if the sample interval of Measuring Group 1 is 2 ms,
the sample interval of other measuring groups cannot be set to 5
ms.
There are sample rates that are higher than the sample rate Appears if the sample rate of measuring group 1 is set lower than
of Group 1. the sample rate of another measuring group.
Change the sample rate of the relevant groups.
There are sample intervals lower than the sample interval of Appears if the sample interval of measuring group 1 is set greater
Group 1. than the sample interval of another measuring group.
Change the sample interval of the relevant groups.
Select the target channel on the sheet. To carry out P1X Measure or P2X Measure, select the channel to be
measured in the Measurement Settings screen.
Turn OFF GO/NO—GO judgment. Appears if GO/NO—GO judgment is ON and the trigger mode is set
to Single (N). Set the trigger mode to Normal or Single to perform
GO/NO—GO judgment.
Set to other than the Single(N) trigger mode before changing Cannot be turned ON when the trigger mode is set to Single(N). Set
to ON. the trigger mode to Normal or Single.
File divided. The file has been divided automatically, because the recording file
size exceeded 2 GB.
Failed to generate file Failed to save the data.
11-4 IM 720120-61E
11.2 Messages
Message Explanation/Corrective Action 1

Disconnecting the unit. Appears if you search for and connect to an SL1000 in the
Connection & Group Settings screen and then close the Connection
& Group Settings screen using the Cancel button. The SL1000 will
be disconnected.
Turn OFF GO/NO—GO judgment before starting to record. Recording is not allowed if GO/NO—GO judgment is ON. 2
Turn OFF GO/NO—GO judgment before specifying Measure Waveform parameter measurement is not allowed if GO/NO—GO
Settings. judgment is ON.
Failed to load the setup file. The setup file is corrupt.
Cannot find the appropriate unit. Unable to detect SL1000s whose communication settings can be 3
Connect to the unit with USB. specified. Check that:
• The SL1000 is connected.
• The SL1000 is turned ON.
• The group ID of the SL1000 is set to zero.
Connection failed. Appears if the connection to the SL1000 fails when making a 4
reconnection on the Self Test screen.
Cannot find Xviewer. Select Xviewer. Unable to find Xviewer (a software provided with this software).
Specify the location of the Xviewer application.
Stop measurement before changing settings. You cannot change the settings while the SL1000 is measuring. 5
Stopping measurement and sending settings to the unit. Appears in cases such as when the software is started by specifying
Previous Settings for the start—up option while the SL1000 is
measuring.
The software will stop the measurement and send the previous
settings to the SL1000. 6
Recording in progress. Appears when the software is started by specifying Previous
Settings for the start—up option while the SL1000 is recording.
Select the action from the choices displayed.
Stop recording? Appears if the exit option in the environment settings is set to End
ACQ and you close the software while the connected SL1000 is 7
recording.
Stop recording before changing settings. You cannot change the settings while the SL1000 is recording.
Select the recording source channel in Measurement Appears if you start recording without selecting a channel to be
Settings. recorded. Click OK to open the Measurement Settings screen. 8
To execute this operation, stop measurement first. Not allowed while the SL1000 is measuring.
To execute this operation, stop recording first. Not allowed while the SL1000 is recording.
The measuring time must be increased. Change to the The measuring time must be long enough so that the number of
minimum time? samples is greater than or equal to 1000. This message appears if
you need to change the measuring time at the new sample rate. If 9
you select Yes, the minimum time for the new sample rate is set. If
you select No, the sample rate is set back to the original value.
The measuring time must be decreased. Change to the The maximum measuring time varies depending on the maximum
maximum time? sample rate (Measuring Group 1) and the number of channels. This
message appears if you need to change the measuring time at the 10
new sample rate. If you select Yes, the maximum time for the new
sample rate is set. If you select No, the sample rate is set back to
the original value.
Assign the source channels to measuring groups in
Connection & Group Settings.
Appears if you start a measurement without assigning channels
to measuring groups. Click OK to open the Connection & Group
11
Settings screen.
Maintenance
Assign at least one master unit’s module to Measuring Group Register at least one master unit module in measuring group 1.
1.
If the most significant digit of the highest sample rate of If the most significant digit of the maximum sample rate within a 12
channels within a display group is 5, a channel set to the next display group is 5 (such as 50 MS/s and 5 M/s), a channel cannot
fastest sample rate whose most significant digit is 2 cannot be registered to the group that is set to the next fastest sample rate
be added to the group. whose most significant digit is 2 (such as 20 MS/s and 2 MS/s).
Assign the channel to another display group or reassign the For example, if the maximum sample rate of channels registered to
channel with the maximum sample rate. Display Group 1 is 500 kS/s, channels with a sample rate set to 200 App
kS/s cannot be registered to Display Group 1.
If the most significant digit of the highest sample rate of If the most significant digit of the maximum sample rate within a
channels within a display group is 5, a channel set to the next same display group is 2 (such as 20 MS/s and 2 M/s), a channel
fastest sample rate whose most significant digit is 2 cannot cannot be registered that is set to the next faster sample rate whose
be in the same group. most significant digit is 5 (such as 50 MS/s and 5 MS/s).
Index
Before changing the current channel, add another channel For example, if the maximum sample rate of channels registered to
to change the maximum sample rate or remove the channel Display Group 1 is 200 kS/s, channels with a sample rate set to 500
with the maximum sample rate whose most significant digit is kS/s cannot be registered to Display Group 1.
2 or 5.
IM 720120-61E 11-5
11.2 Messages

When the maximum sample rate of the channel in the same Appears if the error condition above occurs as a result of changing
Display Group is a series of 5s, the channel of the sample the settings of the current channel.
rate of a series of leading 2s cannot assign in the same
Display Group.
Please assign another channel to change the maximum
sample rate, or omit channels of a series of 5s or 2s, before
change the selected channel.
The maximum measuring time will be exceeded, because the Appears if the number of samples will be less than 1000 even
sample rate difference with respect to Group 1 is too large. if measured over the maximum measuring time, because the
Select a sample rate that is greater than or equal to xxx. difference between the new sample rate and that of Measuring
Group 1 is too large.
The maximum measuring time will be exceeded, because Appears if the number of samples will be less than 1000 even
the sample interval difference with respect to Group 1 is too if measured over the maximum measuring time, because the
large. Select a sample interval that is less than or equal to difference between the new sample interval and that of Measuring
xxx. Group 1 is too large.
The maximum measuring time will be exceeded, because the Appears if the number of samples will be less than 1000 even
sample rate difference with respect to Group 1 is too large. if measured over the maximum measuring time, because the
Change the sample rate of other groups. difference between the new sample rate of Measuring Group 1 and
that of another measuring group is too large.
The maximum measuring time will be exceeded, because Appears if the number of samples will be less than 1000 even
the sample interval difference with respect to Group 1 is too if measured over the maximum measuring time, because the
large. difference between the new sample interval of Measuring Group 1
Change the sample interval of other groups. and that of another measuring group is too large.
To change the settings, connect to the unit first. Appears if you carry out an operation that is invalid when the
SL1000 is not connected.
Cannot find the selected path. Appears if the specified path to the recording folder is invalid.
Cannot find master unit (Unit ID=0). Appears when SL1000s are searched for by group ID designation,
Check the rotary switch in the back of the unit. but a master unit with unit ID set to zero cannot be detected. Set
the unit ID to zero using the rotary switch on the rear panel of the
SL1000 that you want to connect to.
Overlapping unit ID detected. Appears when SL1000s are searched for by group ID designation,
Check the rotary switch in the back of the unit. and multiple SL1000s with the same unit ID are detected. Set the
unit IDs so that they do not overlap with each other using the rotary
switch on the rear panel of the SL1000s.
Changing the trigger count, because the trigger count of the Appears if the trigger count exceeds the maximum trigger count as a
Single (N) trigger mode exceeds the maximum value. result of changing the sample rate or measuring time. The maximum
trigger count that can be specified varies depending on the sample
rate, measuring time, number of channels, and internal memory
size.
Changing the trigger mode to Single, because the maximum Appears if the internal memory size is less than the size needed
trigger count will be 1 otherwise. for two measurements at the set sample rate, measuring time, and
number of channels.
Connect to the unit first. Appears if you carry out an operation that can be executed only
when connected to the SL1000 such as initializing the settings.
Changing the pre—trigger setting, because the pre—trigger Appears if the number of measurement points is changed to a value
exceeds the number of measurement points. less than the pre—trigger value when measuring using an external
clock.
Changing the trigger delay value as follows as a result of the Changing the sample rate changes the trigger delay resolution. This
sample rate change. message appears if the trigger delay value will be changed as a
result of the resolution change.
Data save is complete. Appears when saving of waveform data is completed.
Data to be saved doesn’t exist. Appears when there is no waveform data that can be saved.
File access failure. —
Holding the display Appears while holding the waveform display.
Changing the trigger level. Appears if the trigger level will be changed as a result of the trigger
level going out of range due to a range change.
Changing the alarm level. Appears if the alarm level will be changed as a result of the alarm
level going out of range due to a range change.
WARNING: Formatting will erase all data. Appears when the alarm level goes outside the range due to a range
To format the disk, click OK. To quit, click CANCEL. change and the alarm level is adjusted.
Failed to display some channels because of the higher When multiple channels are assigned to a single display group, the
sample rate. displaying of the next set of data starts overwriting the current set of
data that is in the process of being displayed. To prevent this from
happening, a portion of the channel display is not shown while this
message is displayed.
11-6 IM 720120-61E
11.2 Messages
Message Explanation/Corrective Action 1

Disconnected the unit. Appears when the SL1000 is disconnected improperly such as by
removing the communication cable or by turning the SL1000 OFF
while connected to the SL1000.
All waveform data of the unit memory will be cleared. Appears when the SL1000 memory is cleared.
Two or more units of the same group ID detected. —
2
Turn OFF the power of the overlapping unit once and change
group ID in the back of the unit.
Formatting internal HDD. Appears when the hard disk is being formatted through self-test.
Select the target channels. Appears if you click OK without selecting any measurement 3
channel on the Measurement Settings screen. Select measurement
channels.
Select the target measure items. Appears if you click OK without selecting any measurement item on
the Measurement Settings screen. Select measurement items.
Necesarry files not found. Confirm the folder of update file. Appears if a file required for updating the firmware is not available
4
in the specified folder on the firmware update screen. Select an
appropriate folder.
Sync. Failure Detected, and disconnect the unit. Appears when a sync error is detected after units operating in sync
are detected but before they are confirmed (OK or Next has not
been clicked) on the Connection & Group Settings screen. A sync
5
error may occur such as when a communication cable or a sync
cable is disconnected. Check the connection and reconnect.A unit
message (943) appears if the error occurs after confirmation on the
Connection & Group Settings screen. 6
Saving waveform. Appears while saving waveform data.
Wait for a moment.
Failed to display some channels because of no data in Appears when channels are assigned to a single display group from
display time. different measuring groups and those channels are set to extremely
different sample rates and measured data is not available in a 7
channel set to a low sample rate.
Confirm the input signal of external clock. Appears if you set the clock source to an external signal and you
start measurement without applying the external clock. Check the
Cannot find File Utility. Select File Utility.

external clock input.
Appears when the File Utility is not found. The File Utility is installed
8
along with the Acquisition Software. Reinstall the Acquisition
Software.
A synchronous cable is not correctly connected. Appears such as when slave units have been detected but sync
Please confirm the connection of synchronous cable. cables are not connected. Check the sync cable connections and 9
search again.
xxx files transferred. Displays the progress of the file transfer between the PC and an
SL1000.
Transfer complete in xxx. Displays the estimated remaining time to transfer files between the
PC and an SL1000. 10
Completed all file transfer. Appears when a file transfer between the PC and an SL1000 is
completed.
Invalid folder name. Appears when the name of the new folder that you created contains
Check the input characters. invalid characters in the file transfer screen. Enter a proper folder
name.
11
xxx already exists. Overwrite? A overwrite confirmation message appears when the transfer
Maintenance
destination contains files with the same name as those that you are
trying to transfer when you execute file transfer between the PC and
an SL1000. 12
xxx files deleted. Displays the progress when deleting files or folders in the file
transfer screen.
Completed all file deletion. Appears when deleting of files or folders is complete in the file
transfer screen.
Delete selected file/directory? Appears when you execute the deletion of files or folders in the file App
transfer screen.
Fail to download. Appears when you try to transfer between the PC and an SL1000 a
xxx is on recording. file that is currently being recorded to.
Aborting file deletion. Appears when you cancel the operation while files or folders are
being deleted in the file transfer screen.
Index
PC HDD is full. Download was cancelled. Appears when the total transfer source data size exceeds the PC’s
free space when you execute file transfer from an SL1000 to the PC.
IM 720120-61E 11-7
11.2 Messages

HDD is full. Upload was cancelled. Appears when the total transfer source data size exceeds the
SL1000’s free space when you execute file transfer from the PC to
an SL1000.
xxx was not transferred successfully. Displays the file name when a file transfer from an SL1000 to the PC
Download will be aborted. fails.
xxx was not transferred successfully. Displays the file name when a file transfer from the PC to an SL1000
Upload will be aborted. fails.
Acquisition Software does not support the firmware version Appears when the Acquisition Software version is incompatible with
of the unit. the SL1000 firmware. Update the Acquisition Software.
Software update is necessary.
The detected unit is measuring on the synchronous Appears when the master unit is in synchronous operation mode
operation. when only the master has been detected during unit searching.
Change the search conditions so that slave units that are operating
in sync can be detected, and search again.
Load as the setting for synchronous operation. Appears when you connect to an SL1000 that is operating in
sync and you load a setup file that was saved during independent
operation. This message also appears when the Previous Settings
check box is selected in Environment Settings, exited the software
the last time in independent operation mode, and then started the
software in synchronous operation mode.
Select trigger channel. Appears when you close the Trigger Settings screen when you have
set the logical condition to AND in combination trigger and have not
selected a trigger source channel. Select the trigger source channel.
Select alarm channel. Appears when you close the Channel Alarm Settings screen when
you have set the logical condition to AND and have not selected an
alarm channel. Select the alarm channel.
Accumulated/Snapshot waveforms will be cleared to resize a Appears when the size of the area that is used to draw the waveform
waveform area. changes. To clear all the accumulated and snapshot waveforms,
click OK; otherwise, click Cancel.
Accumulated waveforms are displayed. Appears when you change the window size while accumulated or
Clear accumulation to resize the window. snapshot waveforms are displayed. To change the window size,
clear all the accumulated waveforms and snapshot waveforms.
Cannot set marks more than the maximum number of Appears when you set the 129th mark. Delete marks that you no
marks(128). longer need, and set the mark again.
Current Firm Version is not supported, you will not be able to Appears when the Acquisition Software version is incompatible
connect. with the SL1000 firmware. Update the Acquisition Software or the
SL1000 firmware.
11-8 IM 720120-61E
11.2 Messages
File Utility Error Messages 1

Function Message Explanation/Corrective Action
Common Cannot load this file format. These files do not contain waveform data that has
Select files saved using the SL1000. been measured using the SL1000.
Check the files. 2
Failed to load files. Waveform files may be corrupt.
Waveform files may be corrupt. Check the files. Check the files.
Not enough memory. Insufficient PC memory.
Close other applications.
Unsupported DLL version. The waveform data acquisition DLL (SL1000.DLL) 3
Check that it is the latest version. version may be old.
Check that you have the latest version of SL1000.DLL.
Invalid folder or file name. An unavailable folder may have been specified, or
invalid characters may have been used.
Check the folder name and file name. 4
Cannot create a folder. You may be specifying an area where folders cannot
be created, or the disk may be write-protected.
Check the folder path and the disk write-protection
attribute. 5
The output folder cannot be set to "%s." The output destination is set to an area that is
Select another folder. prohibited by the system.
Change the output destination.
File Merge Cannot merge files due to conflicting measurement File merging conditions are not met.
conditions. Check the merging conditions on page 10-11 and the 6
Check the measurement conditions. file list.
The number of files to be combined exceeds the maximum Same as left
number of files (128).
Keep the number of files to be combined within the
maximum allowed number. 7
Cannot merge files measured in Free Run mode using an Same as left
external clock.
Cannot merge files over the time axis measured in Trigger Same as left
mode using an external clock.
Cannot merge WDF files stored on different drives. Same as left
8
Select WDF files stored on the same drive.
Failed to merge files. Files could not be merged due to insufficient free disk
space or corrupted waveform data.
Check the free disk space and the files to merge. 9
Cannot create files contain more than 2 G samples per The number of samples per channel in the files that
channel. you want to merge exceeds 2 G points.
Select files for merging so that the number of points
does not exceed 2 G points.
File Divide An error occurred during File Divide. Multiple errors may have occurred in the file division 10
process.
Click Detail to check the error details.
Cannot divide a file because the file size is less than the Same as left
dividing recording length.
Change the dividing record length.
11
Cannot divide a file because of the file saved in Triggered Same as left
Maintenance
mode.
Select files saved in Free Run mode.
The number of file divisions exceeds the maximum number Same as left 12
of files (1000).
Increase the dividing record length or change the file size
so that the maximum number of files is not exceeded.
Cannot divide a file because the specified time for dividing Same as left
the file is not contained in the recording time. App
Change the time for dividing the files.
Index
IM 720120-61E 11-9
11.2 Messages
Function Message Explanation/Corrective Action

File Divide Set the record length to a value from 1 to 2592000. The specified time value exceeds the allowable record
length range.
Check the value.
Set the record length to a value from 1 to 1000000000. The specified point value exceeds the allowable record
length range.
Check the value.
Set the first data to a value from 1 to 1000000000. The specified point value exceeds the allowable record
length range.
Check the value.
Failed to divide a file. Files could not be divided due to insufficient free disk
space or corrupted waveform data.
Check the free disk space and the source files that you
want to divide.
Waveform An error occurred during Waveform Display Acceleration. Multiple errors may have occurred in the waveform
Display display acceleration process.
Acceleration Click Detail to check the error details.
This file already converted for Waveform Display Same as left
Acceleration.
Select files not converted.
Cannot convert file for Waveform Display Acceleration, Same as left
because the file was saved in Triggered mode.
Select waveform data files saved in Free Run mode.
File An error occurred during File Conversion. Multiple errors may have occurred in the file
Conversion conversion process.
Click Detail to check the error details.
11-10 IM 720120-61E
Chapter 12 Specifications
12.1 Connection to the SL1000 1
Item
Maximum connectable 1000s
Specifications
1 unit (Up to eight units during synchronous operation)
2
Connection type USB or Ethernet (option)
3
12.2 Measurement Functions
Item Specifications 4
Measurement control Measurement start and stop
Measuring groups 4
Measuring Channels During single operation: p to 16 channels total among 4 measuring groups
U
(register up to 16 channels to a single group) 5
During synchronous operation: Up to 128 channels total from four measuring groups
(up to 128 channels can be registered to a single
measuring group)
Measuring mode Free Run and Triggered
ACQ mode Normal, Envelope, and Box Average 6
Clock source Internal and external
Time axis accuracy ±0.005% (under standard operating conditions)
External clock input Frequency range: Up to 5 MHz
Sample rate 5 S/s, 10 S/s, 20 S/s, 50 S/s, 100 S/s, 200 S/s, 500 S/s, 1 kS/s, 2 kS/s, 5 kS/s, 10 kS/s,
20 kS/s, 50 kS/s, 100 kS/s, 1 MS/s, 2 MS/s, 5 MS/s, 10 MS/s, 20 MS/s, 50 MS/s, and
7
100 MS/s
Sample interval 1/sample rate
Maximum record length Varies depending on the measuring mode and the number of modules used in
(internal memory) measurement 8
In Free Run mode
1 module : 32 MW/ch
2 modules : 16 MW/ch
3 to 4 modules : 8 MW/ch
5 to 8 modules : 4 MW/ch 9
In Trigger mode
Normal/ Single (N)
1 module : 10 MW/ch
3 to 4 modules : 5 MW/ch 10
5 to 8 modules : 2.5 MW/ch
Single
1 module : 50 MW/ch
11
12
Specifications
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 12-1
12.2 Measurement Functions /12.3 Trigger Function
Item Specifications
Measuring time Single mode
(for Triggered mode) Measuring Measuring Time (s)
Channel Number1
2 1000/maximum sample rate2 to 50000000/maximum sample rate2
6, 8 1000/maximum sample rate2 to 10000000/maximum sample rate2
10 to 16: 1000/maximum sample rate2 to 5000000/maximum sample rate2
1 Measuring Channel Number: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
2 The sample rate of Measuring Group 1.
Normal or Single (N) mode

Measuring Measuring Time (s)
Channel Number1
6, 8 1000/maximum sample rate2 to 5000000/maximum sample rate2
10 to 16 1000/maximum sample rate2 to 2500000/maximum sample rate2
2 The sample rate of Measuring Group 1.
Measurement points Measuring Measuring Time
(for external clock) Channel Number1
2 10 to 50000000
4 10 to 25000000
6, 8 10 to 10000000
10 to 16 10 to 5000000
12.3 Trigger Function
Item Specifications
Trigger mode Normal, Single, and Single (N)
Trigger count 2 to infinity
Trigger class Simple and Combination
Simple trigger
Trigger source CH1 to CH161, EXT (signal applied to the TRIG IN terminal), LINE (commercial power
source signal connected to the SL1000), and time (a specified time)
Trigger slope CH1 to CH161: Rising, falling, and rising/falling
EXT: Rising and falling
LINE: Fixed to rising edge
Set the date (year/month/day), time (hour/minute/second), and time interval (1 min to
24 h) if triggering with time.
Combination trigger
Trigger source CH1 to CH161 and EXT (signal input from the TRIG IN terminal)
Trigger slope CH1 to CH161: Rising, falling, rising/falling, H, L, IN, OUT, IN(L), and OUT(L)
EXT: Rising and falling
Selectable range of trigger ±Measuring range around 0
levels
Hysteresis Low, Middle, and High
Hold off time 0 to 10 s
Pre-trigger 0 to 100% (0 to the number of measured points – 1 for external clock)
Trigger delay 0 to 10 s
Manual trigger Controlled from the toolbar
1 Up to CH128 during synchronous operation
12-2 IM 720120-61E
12.4 Recording Function 1
Item
Recording control
Specifications
Recording start and stop and manual division
2
Recording destination PC hard disk, internal hard disk, and PC + internal hard disk (the internal hard disk is an
option)
Maximum real-time hard disk PC hard disk: 1.6 MS/s(=100 kS/s x 16 channels > 10 kS/s x 128 channels
recording speed2 (1 s recording time or longer, or 1 s recording interval or longer 3
For recording that uses alarms or external trigger signals
Recording using alarms: The time spacing between the end of one
recording to the next alarm signal that starts the
recording operation. The time spacing must be
at least 1 s. 4
Recording using external trigger signals: The time spacing between the end of one
recording to the next trigger signal. The time
spacing must be at least 2 s.)
Record conditions For FreeRun mode: Immediate, Abs. Time, Time Divided, Alarm, and External Trigger
For Trigger Mode: Each Trigger 5
Recording time and recording For internal clock: 0.1 to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s) (if the recording
points (for Free Run mode) interval is set to OFF)
0.001 to 2000000000 points/maximum sample rate (s) (if the
recording interval is not set to OFF)
For external clock: 10 to 2000000000 points
6
Record interval (for Free Run For internal clock: None, 1 to 86400 (s) (1 day)
mode) For external clock: None, 2 to 1000000 points
No. of recordings 1 to 100000 and infinite
File designation Folder designation, file name designation, auto naming (date and sequence number), 7
and comments
File order Sequential and cyclic
File format YOKOGAWA original binary format (.wdf extension)
1 Cannot be used during synchronous operation 8
2 The maximum speed is a reference value. The actual speed varies depending on the measurement conditions and the PC
performance.
10
11
12
Specifications
App
Index
IM 720120-61E 12-3
12.5 Functions
GO/NO-GO Function (Triggered Mode)

Item Specifications
Mode Waveform parameters
Operating conditions Always, True, and False
Judgment action Data save and buzzer
Output logic AND, OR
GO/NO-GO judgment range ACQ data and data between cursors
Judgment number 1 to 16
Channel Ch1 to Ch16
Judgment criteria In and Out
Judgment parameters P-P, Amp, Max, Min, High, Low, Avg., Middle, RMS, Sdev, +OvrShoot, -OvrShoot,
Rise, Fall, Freq, Period, +Width, -Width, Duty, Pulse Cnt., Burst1, Burst2, AvgFreq,
AvgPeriod, Int1TY, and Int2TY
Judgment range Judgment high and low limits
(–9.9999+E30 to +9.9999+E30)
Alarm Function
Item Specifications
Alarm types System alarm, channel alarm (for Free Run mode)
Alarm output logic1 AND, OR
Alarm channel1 Ch1 to Ch16
Alarm pattern1 H, L, IN(L), and OUT(L)
(Channel alarm)
Alarm level1 ±Measuring range around 0
(Channel alarm)
Alarm hysteresis1 Low, Middle, and High
(Channel alarm)
System alarm Fan stop, ACQ memory buffer overrun, hard disk full, and sync. failure detection
Alarm output1 Hold and nonhold
Alarm detection The time from an alarm occurrence to alarm release or the time from an alarm release
to alarm occurrence is greater than or equal to 500 ms.
1 Free Run Mode
Display Functions
Item Specifications
Display group assignment Channel assignment to display groups (up to 4 groups)
Waveform display format T-Y
Zoom (for Triggered mode) Time-axis zoom display, zoom cursor
Display format: Main/Zoom/Main + Zoom
Roll display Displays when Triggered mode is Single, and 1 s Measuring time is or longer.
Displayed time Maximum sample interval × 10 to channel record length/maximum sample rate
Current value display Digital, bar graph, meter, and thermometer
Display scale OFF (= measuring range), user-defined scale, and auto scale
Display axis setting Multi zone, Slide zone, and Edit zone
Graph settings Background color, grid color, line width, alarm level display, current mark, X-axis
display format, X-axis scaling, X-axis unit, etc.
Waveform dot connection Line, Sine, Pulse, Dot (no interpolation)
Accumulation display1 Accumulates T-Y and X-Y waveforms
Snapshot1 The waveform that is currently being displayed can be retained on the screen as a
snapshot waveform.
Display color setting and snapshot waveform deletion
X-Y Display1 X-axis channel settings, selection of main or zoomed waveform (in Triggered mode),
and selection of the number of data points to draw (2K, 10K, 100K)
Mark display1 Setting of marks (up to 128 marks, each mark can display up to 16 characters), display
color setting, mark editing, deletion of marks, mark list, collectively saving mark data
with the same file name as the waveform data, and loading mark data into Xviewer
12-4 IM 720120-61E
12.5 Functions
Display control Display hold and hold release
Unit operation status monitor Measurement status, recording status, trigger status,
alarm output status, GO/NO-GO output status, free disk space, recording buffer status,
error information, and recorded file information
Alarm history list List of the following items 2
Channel alarm status, alarm generation unit, alarm generation channel, alarm pattern,
alarm measured value, alarm occurrence time, and alarm end time
Waveform analysis of alarm locations
1 Version 2.10 and later 3
Waveform Analysis Function

Cursor Readouts from the horizontal cursors, vertical cursors, cursors by sample rate
Readouts from the horizontal cursors, vertical cursors, and cursors by sample rate,
and X-Y waveform cursors (X-Y cursors must be moved on T-Y waveforms)1
Zoom (Triggered mode)
Past data/history waveform
Time-axis zoom display, zoom cursor
Displays past data stored in the SL1000 memory (in Free Run mode)
5
analysis Displays up to 5000 history waveforms (in Triggered mode)
View past data/history waveform using a scroll bar, load history waveform by
specifying an acquisition number, clear history waveforms
Auto play:1 Automatically displays past data or history waveforms. In Triggered 6
mode, zoomed waveforms scroll automatically. Auto play, reverse
play, stop, go to oldest data, go to most recent data, and play speed
adjustment
Waveform parameter Compute 26 waveform parameters for each channel in display group
measurement (Triggered P-P, maximum, minimum, rms, average, standard deviation, undershoot, overshoot, 7
mode) high, low, amplitude, (maximum + minimum)/2, rise time, fall time, frequency, period,
average frequency, average period, time width greater than or equal to the mesial
value, time width less than or equal to the mesial value, duty ratio, pulse count, burst
width (Burst1, Burst2), area (Int1TY, Int2TY)
8
1 Version 2.10 and later
File Function
Item Specifications
9
Setup file Load and save Acquisition Software settings
Waveform data file Load (Xviewer), save (file format: wdf, csv, or bin; range to save:1 all, display, cursor,
zoom display, and user), and save all data (up to 5000 history waveforms)
Waveform screen capture file Screen capture data format: BMP or PNGWaveform parameters (Triggered mode) 10
Saves waveform parameters in CSV format
Waveform parameter (for Save waveform parameters (*.csv)
Triggered mode)
Unit file operation File operations on the unit’s internal hard disk (download, upload, delete, create folder,
rename, and collective transfer during synchronous operation) 11
File Utility Function

File merging Merge waveform data files over time1 or over channels
Specifications
File division Divides waveform data files and extracts a portion of the data
Waveform display acceleration Adds display data to the waveform data files. The display data is used to accelerate
waveform displaying on Xviewer. App
File format Converts waveform data files (.wdf extension) to ASCII (.csv extension) or binary (.bin
extension)2 files
1 In Free Run mode only
2 Version 2.10 and later
Index
IM 720120-61E 12-5
12.5 Functions
Other Features
Item Specifications
Auto setup Automatically sets the voltage and time axis for the waveform registered to measuring
group 1 (in Triggered mode)
Auto setup cancellation
Initialization Resets the settings to factory default values
Initialization cancellation
Calibration Auto calibration1 and manual calibration available
Environment settings Measurement options, recording option2 startup options, and end options
Communication settings Set the group name, unit name, IP address, FTP account
(during USB connection)
Self-test SL1000 keyboard test, ACQ memory test, system memory test, backup memory test,
internal hard disk test, internal hard disk formatting, CPU temperature measurement,
SL1000 version display
SL1000 system information Lists the SL1000 system information and detailed measurement/recording parameters
display
SL1000 key lock Control the SL1000 key lock and release
Unit information display Displays the unit’s firmware version and serial number
1 Cannot be used during synchronous operation
2 During synchronous operation only
12-6 IM 720120-61E
Appendix
Appendix 1 Number of Data Points and Acquisition 1

Count
If measuring with the trigger mode set to Single (N), the number of data points that can
be acquired to the SL1000 internal memory varies depending on the number of channels 2
registered to the measuring group, sample rate, and acquisition time.
Acquisition Count
Number of Data
Number of Measuring Channels
3
Points (N)1
10 to 16 6 to 8 4 2
Minimum number of 5000 5000 5000 5000
points2 ≤ N ≤ 1 k
1 k < N ≤ 2.5 k 2977 5000 5000 5000 4
2.5 k < N ≤ 5 k 1597 3195 5000 5000
5 k < N ≤ 10 k 818 1637 3275 5000
10 k < N ≤ 25 k 326 654 1309 2620
25 k < N ≤ 50 k 162 326 654 1309
50 k < N ≤ 100 k 80 162 326 654
5
100 k < N ≤ 250 k 31 64 130 261
250 k < N ≤ 500 k 15 31 64 130
500 k < N ≤ 1 M 7 15 31 63
1 M < N ≤ 2.5 M 2 5 11 24 6
2.5 M < N ≤ 5 M 1 2 5 11
5 M < N ≤ 10 M 1 2 5
10 M < N ≤ 25 M 1 1
25 M < N ≤ 50 M
50 M < N ≤ 100 M
1
7
100 M < N ≤ 250 M
250 M < N ≤ 500 M
500 M < N ≤ 1 G
1G<N≤2G 8
1 The number of data points can also be determined from the following equation.
For internal clock
The number of data points = sample rate (S/s) × measuring time (s)
1 k = 1000 9
1 M = 1000 k = 1000 × 1000
1 G = 1000000 k = 1000000 × 1000
For external clock
The number of data points = the set number of measured points 10
2 For internal clock: 1000 points
For external clock: 10 points
11
12
App
Appendix
Index
IM 720120-61E App-1
Appendix 2 Maximum Number of Measured Points
and Measuring Time
The tables below list the maximum number of measured points that can be saved to the
internal memory and the measuring time for Free Run and Triggered modes.
Free Run Mode Maximum Number of Measured Points That Can Be Saved to 128 MW Memory
and Measuring Time (unit: s)
Number of Measuring 2CH 4CH 6CH 8CH 10CH 12CH 14CH 16CH
Channels
Maximum Number of 32 M 16 M 8M 8M 4M 4M 4M 4M
Measured Points /ch
100 MS/s 0.32 0.16 0.08 0.08 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
50 MS/s 0.64 0.32 0.16 0.16 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
20 MS/s 1.6 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
10 MS/s 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
5 MS/s 6.4 3.2 1.6 1.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
2 MS/s 16 8 4 4 2 2 2 2
1 MS/s 32 16 8 8 4 4 4 4
500 kS/s 64 32 16 16 8 8 8 8
Maximum Sample Rate
200 kS/s 160 80 40 40 20 20 20 20

100 kS/s 320 160 80 80 40 40 40 40
50 kS/s 640 320 160 160 80 80 80 80
20 kS/s 1600 800 400 400 200 200 200 200
10 kS/s 3200 1600 800 800 400 400 400 400
5 kS/s 6400 3200 1600 1600 800 800 800 800
2 kS/s 16000 8000 4000 4000 2000 2000 2000 2000
1 kS/s 32000 16000 8000 8000 4000 4000 4000 4000
500 S/s 64000 32000 16000 16000 8000 8000 8000 8000
200 S/s 160000 80000 40000 40000 20000 20000 20000 20000
100 S/s 320000 160000 80000 80000 40000 40000 40000 40000
50S/s 640000 320000 160000 160000 80000 80000 80000 80000
20 S/s 1600000 800000 400000 400000 200000 200000 200000 200000
10 S/s 3200000 1600000 800000 800000 400000 400000 400000 400000
5 S/s 6400000 3200000 1600000 1600000 800000 800000 800000 800000
App-2 IM 720120-61E
Appendix 2 Maximum Number of Measurement Points and Measuring Time
Normal or Single(N) Triggered Mode Maximum Number of Measured Points per Acquisition and 1
Measuring Time (unit: s)
Channels
Maximum Number of 10 M (×5) 10 M (×2) 5M(×2) 5M(×2) 2.5M(×2) 2.5M(×2) 2.5M(×2) 2.5M(×2) 2
Measured Points /ch
100 MS/s 0.1 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
50 MS/s 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
20 MS/s 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.25 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125
10 MS/s 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 3
5 MS/s 2 2 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
2 MS/s 5 5 2.5 2.5 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
1 MS/s 10 10 5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
500 kS/s 20 20 10 10 5 5 5 5
4
Maximum Sample Rate
200 kS/s 50 50 25 25 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5

100 kS/s 100 100 50 50 25 25 25 25
50 kS/s 200 200 100 100 50 50 50 50
20 kS/s 500 500 250 250 125 125 125 125
10 kS/s 1000 1000 500 500 250 250 250 250 5
5 kS/s 2000 2000 1000 1000 500 500 500 500
2 kS/s 5000 5000 2500 2500 1250 1250 1250 1250
1 kS/s 10000 10000 5000 5000 2500 2500 2500 2500
500 S/s 20000 20000 10000 10000 5000 5000 5000 5000
200 S/s 50000 50000 25000 25000 12500 12500 12500 12500 6
100 S/s 100000 100000 50000 50000 25000 25000 25000 25000
50 S/s 200000 200000 100000 100000 50000 50000 50000 50000
20 S/s 500000 500000 250000 250000 125000 125000 125000 125000
10 S/s
5 S/s
1000000
2000000
1000000
2000000
500000
1000000
500000
1000000
250000
500000
250000
500000
250000
500000
250000
500000
7
The value in parentheses by the maximum number of measured points is the corresponding number of triggers in Single (N) mode.
Single Trigger Maximum Number of Measured Points for One Acquisition and Measuring Time (unit: s)
8
Channels
Maximum Number of 50 M 25M 10M 10M 5M 5M 5M 5M
Measured Points /ch
100 MS/s 0.5 0.25 0.1 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 9
50 MS/s 1 0.5 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
20 MS/s 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.5 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
10 MS/s 5 2.5 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
5 MS/s 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1
2 MS/s 25 12.5 5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 10
1 MS/s 50 25 10 10 5 5 5 5
500 kS/s 100 50 20 20 10 10 10 10
Maximum Sample Rate
200 kS/s 250 125 50 50 25 25 25 25

100 kS/s 500 250 100 100 50 50 50 50 11
50 kS/s 1000 500 200 200 100 100 100 100
20 kS/s 2500 1250 500 500 250 250 250 250
10 kS/s 5000 2500 1000 1000 500 500 500 500
5 kS/s 10000 5000 2000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000
2 kS/s 25000 12500 5000 5000 2500 2500 2500 2500 12
1 kS/s 50000 25000 10000 10000 5000 5000 5000 5000
500 S/s 100000 50000 20000 20000 10000 10000 10000 10000
200 S/s 250000 125000 50000 50000 25000 25000 25000 25000
100 S/s 500000 250000 100000 100000 50000 50000 50000 50000
50 S/s 1000000 500000 200000 200000 100000 100000 100000 100000 App
20 S/s 2500000 1250000 500000 500000 250000 250000 250000 250000
Appendix
10 S/s 2592000 2500000 1000000 1000000 500000 500000 500000 500000

5 S/s 2592000 2592000 2000000 2000000 1000000 1000000 1000000 1000000
Index
IM 720120-61E App-3
Appendix 2 Maximum Number of Measurement Points and Measuring Time
Maximum Recording Time per File in Free Run Mode (in seconds)
The maximum recording time per file is 2 G samples per channel.
The maximum recording time is calculated using the following equation.
Sample rate Time1
100 MS/s 20
(20 s)
50 MS/s 40
(40 s)
20 MS/s 100
(1 min 40 s)
10 MS/s 200
(3 min 20 s)
5 MS/s 400
(6 min 40 s)
2 MS/s 1000
(16 min 40 s)
1 MS/s 2000
(33 min 20 s)
500 kS/s 4000
(1 h 6 min 40 s)
200 kS/s 10000
(2 h 46 min 40 s)
100 kS/s 20000
(5 h 33 min 20 s)
50 kS/s 40000
(11 h 6 min 40 s)
20 kS/s 100000
(1 day 3 h 46 min 40 s)
10 kS/s 200000
(2 day 7 h 33 min 20 s)
5 kS/s 400000
(4 day 15 h 6 min 40 s)
2 kS/s 1000000
(11 day 13 h 46 min 40 s)
1 kS/s 2000000
(23 day 3 h 33 min 20 s)
500 S/s 4000000
(46 day 7 h 6 min 40 s)
200 S/s 10000000
(115 day 17 h 46 min 40 s)
100 S/s 20000000
(231 day 11 h 33 min 20 s)
50 S/s 40000000
(1 year 97 day 23 h 6 min 40 s)
20 S/s 100000000
(3 years 62 day 9 h 46 min 40 s)
10 S/s 200000000
(6 years 124 day 19 h 33 min 20 s)
5 S/s 400000000
(12 years 249 day 15 h 6 min 40 s)
Settings that exceed the SL1000 recording performance (1.6 MS/s): Buffer overrun
may occur.
Settings that exceed the SL1000 recording performance (1.6 MS/s) depending on
the recording conditions: Buffer overrun may occur depending on the units that will
be recording, the recording destination, and the number of channels that will be
recording.
1 Recording times that exceed 30 days are calculated values.
App-4 IM 720120-61E
Appendix 3 Number of Channels and Measurement 1
Group Sample Rate
In Triggered mode, the minimum sample rate that you can specify on measuring groups
2
2 to 4 varies depending on the number of measurement channels and the measuring
group 1 sample rate.
See the following table.
Measuring Group Minimum Sample Rate (S/s) That Can Be Set to Other Groups 3
1 Sample Rate 4ch1 6ch, 8ch1 10ch, 12ch, 14ch, 16ch
100 MS/s 5k 10 k (20 k2) 50 k
50 MS/s 5k 5k 20 k
20 MS/s 1k 2k 5k 4
10 MS/s 500 1k 2k
5 MS/s 200 500 1k
2 MS/s 100 200 500
1 MS/s 50 100 200
500 kS/s 20 50 100 5
200 kS/s 10 20 50
100 kS/s 5 10 20
50 kS/s 5 5 10
20 kS/s 5 5 5 6
10 kS/s 5 5 5
5 kS/s 5 5 5
2 kS/s 5 5 5
1 kS/s 5 5 5
500 S/s 5 5 5
7
200 S/s 5 5 5
100 S/s 5 5 5
50 S/s 5 5 5
20 S/s 5 5 5 8
10 S/s 5 5 5
5 S/s 5 5 5
1 The number of measurement channels during synchronous operation is equal to

the maximum number of channels used by a unit among all the linked units. 9
2 If the number of measuring channels is six or eight and the sample rate of
measuring group 2, 3, or 4 is 50 MS/s, the minimum sample rate for other
measuring groups will be 20 kS/s.
10
11
12
App
Appendix
Index
IM 720120-61E App-5
Index 1
A Page D Page 2
abs. time......................................................................... 5-2, 5-6 DC-RMS..................................................................... 1-12, 1-15
AC100V............................................................................... 4-20 decelerating prediction........................................................ 1-20
AC200V............................................................................... 4-20 default gateway..................................................................... 3-2
acceleration......................................................................... 4-16
acceleration measurement.................................................. 1-18
deleting files from the file list............................................... 10-7
DHCP.................................................................................... 3-2 3
ACCL................................................................................... 1-12 display data........................................................................... 1-1
accumulate................................................................. 1-43, 6-20 displayed channels................................................................ 6-3
acq memory overrun........................................................... 1-35 display format........................................................................ 6-5
ACQ mem. test...................................................................... 9-4
acquisition mode............................................................ 1-9, 4-1
display groups.............................................................. 1-27, 6-1
display range......................................................................... 6-2
4
AC-RMS..................................................................... 1-12, 1-15 display time........................................................................... 6-2
action................................................................................... 4-51 display updating.................................................................... 6-6
active waveform........................................................... 1-40, 6-9 dist/mesial/prox mode........................................................... 7-4
alarm............................................................ 1-35, 4-45, 5-2, 5-8 divided files.......................................................................... 5-14 5
alarm level........................................................................... 4-46 drop-down list box............................................................... 1-44
alarm log.............................................................................. 6-18 duty cycle................................................................... 1-19, 4-27
alarm output............................................................... 1-36, 4-47
alarm output state................................................................ 1-40 E Page
alarm patterns............................................................ 1-35, 4-46
EM pickup............................................................................ 4-20
6
aliasing................................................................................. 1-11
envelope mode...................................................................... 1-9
ange to save.......................................................................... 8-2
equal division..................................................................... 10-14
assignment, high/low............................................................. 7-4
error messages
auto recording..................................................................... 1-22
auto setup............................................................................ 4-52
Acquisition Software....................................................... 11-4
File Utility........................................................................ 11-9
7
aX+b............................................................................. 1-14, 4-7
SL1000 Unit................................................................... 11-2
Ethernet.......................................................................... 3-2, 3-4
B Page exiting
backup mem. test.................................................................. 9-4 Acquisition Software........................................................ 2-8 8
bandwidth limit.............................................................. 1-13, 4-5 File Utility....................................................................... 10-1
bias...................................................................................... 4-17 exit options............................................................................ 9-3
box average mode............................................................... 1-10 expansion............................................................................ 6-14
bridge voltage...................................................................... 4-13 external clock............................................................. 1-10, 4-34
brightness, adjustment........................................................ 1-40 external trigger.................................................................... 4-39 9
burnout................................................................................ 1-16
F Page
C Page fan stop................................................................................ 1-35
calibration............................................................................ 9-10
channel................................................................................ 1-29
file conversion................................................................... 10-20
file divide........................................................................... 10-12
10
channel alarm............................................................. 1-35, 4-45 file information..................................................................... 1-39
chatter elimination............................................................... 4-22 file list.................................................................................. 10-2
check box............................................................................ 1-44 file list, sorting...................................................................... 10-6
clipping.............................................................................. 10-14 file merge............................................................................. 10-8 11
clock...................................................................................... 9-1 file name....................................................................... 1-26, 5-4
clock source................................................................. 1-10, 4-1 file order....................................................................... 1-26, 5-5
combination......................................................................... 1-29 file properties, displaying..................................................... 10-4
communication settings........................................................ 9-11 files to manipulate, selecting............................................... 10-5
Computed data, saving......................................................... 8-6 filter...................................................................................... 1-21 12
computed parameters........................................................... 7-4 free run mode................................................................. 1-9, 4-1
computing range.................................................................... 7-6 frequency........................................................... 1-19, 4-18, 4-23
connection...................................................................... 1-2, 3-1 frequency measurement...................................................... 1-19
coupling................................................................................. 4-4 FTP................................................................................. 3-3, 8-5
CPU....................................................................................... 2-1 App
criteria.................................................................................. 1-37 G Page
current................................................................................... 4-2
gauge factor............................................................... 1-17, 4-13
current value.......................................................................... 6-5
GND..................................................................................... 1-12
current value data.................................................................. 1-1
current value display........................................................... 1-27
GO/NO-GO judgment................................................. 1-37, 4-49 Index
GO/NO-GO judgment output state...................................... 1-40
cursor.................................................................................... 7-1
graph settings........................................................................ 6-2
Index
cursor measurement........................................................... 1-33

group ID................................................................................. 1-7
cyclic............................................................................. 1-26, 5-5
IM 720120-61E Index-1
Index
H Page O Page
HDD format............................................................................ 9-5 offset.................................................................................... 1-21
HDD full............................................................................... 1-35 operating information........................................................... 9-12
hold off................................................................................. 1-31 operating system................................................................... 2-1
horizontal............................................................................... 7-1 option button........................................................................ 1-44
horizontal cursors................................................................ 1-33 output hold........................................................................... 4-48
hysteresis................................................................... 1-30, 1-35
P Page
I Page P1-P2........................................................................... 1-14, 4-7
immediate.............................................................................. 5-2 past data, displaying............................................................. 6-11
initialize.................................................................................. 9-9 PC HDD................................................................................. 5-1
input coupling...................................................................... 1-12 PC HDD+Unit HDD............................................................... 5-1
installation............................................................................. 2-2 PC system, recommended.................................................... 2-1
internal clock....................................................................... 1-10 period......................................................................... 1-19, 4-26
internal HDD test................................................................... 9-4 power signal........................................................................ 4-42
inversion.............................................................................. 1-14 power supply frequency............................................. 1-19, 4-29
IP address...................................................................... 1-7, 3-2 preset.................................................................................. 4-20
pre-trigger............................................................................ 1-31
J Page probe..................................................................................... 4-4
probe attenuation................................................................ 1-13
judgment action.......................................................... 1-37, 4-51
pull-up 5V............................................................................ 4-20
judgment area..................................................................... 4-50
pulse average...................................................................... 1-21
pulse integration......................................................... 1-20, 4-31
K Page pulse width................................................................. 1-19, 4-30
keyboard test......................................................................... 9-4
key-lock................................................................................. 9-8 R Page
real file merging................................................................... 10-9
L Page Rec........................................................................................ 4-3
label....................................................................................... 4-3 recordings, number of........................................................... 5-3
line....................................................................................... 1-29 recording, starting................................................................ 5-13
linear scaling................................................................ 1-14, 4-7 recording time........................................................................ 5-2
lines, selection..................................................................... 1-44 recording, turning on/off......................................................... 4-3
link file merging................................................................. 10-10 record interval........................................................................ 5-3
Logic 3V.............................................................................. 4-20 record state......................................................................... 1-39
Logic 5V.............................................................................. 4-20 reduction.............................................................................. 6-14
Logic 12V............................................................................ 4-20 remaining hard disk indicator.............................................. 1-39
Logic 24V............................................................................ 4-20 RJC...................................................................................... 1-16
logical condition................................................................... 4-39 RMS measurement............................................................. 1-15
rotation, number of.............................................................. 4-25
M Page RPMs/RPSs......................................................................... 1-19
manual trigger............................................................ 1-32, 5-13
mark............................................................................ 1-43, 6-22 S Page
maximum sample rate........................................................... 4-3 sample interval............................................................. 1-11, 4-3
measured data, loading......................................................... 8-2 sample rate................................................................... 1-11, 4-3
measured data, saving.......................................................... 8-1 save unit memory waveform................................................. 8-4
measured raw data................................................................ 1-1 scale........................................................................... 1-27, 1-40
measurement and recording................................................. 1-2 search............................................................................. 3-1, 3-4
measurement, starting......................................................... 4-53 sensitivity............................................................................. 4-17
measurement state.............................................................. 1-39 sequential..................................................................... 1-26, 5-5
measurement, stopping....................................................... 4-53 setup data, loading................................................................ 8-3
measuring groups........................................................... 1-8, 3-5 setup data, saving................................................................. 8-3
measuring mode............................................................. 1-9, 4-1 shunt calibration.................................................................. 4-14
measuring range.......................................................... 1-13, 4-4 signal and data flow............................................................... 1-1
measuring time......................................................... 4-37, App-2 simple.................................................................................. 1-29
memory.................................................................................. 2-1 single mode......................................................................... 1-28
merging files over channels............................................... 10-10 single (N) mode................................................................... 1-28
merging files over time........................................................ 10-9 smoothing filter.................................................................... 1-21
moving average................................................................... 1-21 snapshot..................................................................... 1-43, 6-20
source files, selecting.......................................................... 10-2
N Page specifications....................................................................... 12-1
start condition........................................................................ 5-2
normal mode................................................................ 1-9, 1-28
starting
numeric value display.......................................................... 1-27
Acquisition Software........................................................ 2-7
File Utility....................................................................... 10-1
start-up options...................................................................... 9-3
status bar............................................................................. 9-12
Index-2 IM 720120-61E
Index
stop condition........................................................................ 5-2 Z Page 1
stop prediction..................................................................... 1-20
strain........................................................................... 1-17, 4-11 zero cross............................................................................ 4-20
strain balancing................................................................... 4-13 zone display, turning on/off.................................................. 1-41
subnet mask.......................................................................... 3-2 zones..................................................................... 1-27, 6-5, 6-8
Synchronous Operation......................................................... 1-3
system alarm....................................................................... 1-35
2
system configuration............................................................. 3-5
system mem. test.................................................................. 9-4
T Page 3
TC........................................................................................ 1-12
temperature........................................................................... 4-8
temperature measurement.................................................. 1-16
text box................................................................................ 1-44
thermocouple................................................................ 1-16, 4-9 4
time...................................................................................... 1-29
time trigger.......................................................................... 4-42
trigger.................................................................................. 4-37
trigger class................................................................ 1-29, 4-39
trigger conditions................................................................. 4-38
5
trigger count........................................................................ 4-36
trigger delay......................................................................... 1-31
triggered................................................................................ 4-1
triggered mode...................................................................... 1-9
triggered mode, recording................................................... 5-12
6
trigger level................................................................. 1-30, 4-40
trigger mode........................................................................ 1-28
trigger pattern............................................................. 1-30, 4-40
trigger signal state............................................................... 1-40 7
trigger source............................................................. 1-29, 4-39
troubleshooting..................................................................... 11-1
U Page
uninstallation......................................................................... 2-3
8
unit HDD................................................................................ 5-1
unit ID.................................................................................... 1-7
unit info.................................................................................. 9-6
unit system information......................................................... 9-7 9
USB....................................................................................... 3-1
USB driver............................................................................. 2-4
use PC time settings............................................................. 9-1
V Page 10
velocity....................................................................... 1-20, 4-32
vertical................................................................................... 7-1
vertical cursors.................................................................... 1-33
voltage................................................................................... 4-2
11
W Page
waveform display acceleration.......................................... 10-17
waveform display, turning on/off.......................................... 1-41
waveform parameter measurements................................... 1-33 12
waveform parameters............................................................ 7-3
Waveform screen captures, saving....................................... 8-7
window width....................................................................... 4-41
wizard.................................................................................... 1-6
workflow................................................................................ 1-4
App
X Page
Xviewer................................................................ 6-16, 6-17, 8-2
X-Y waveform............................................................. 1-38, 6-24 Index
Index
IM 720120-61E Index-3

Im720120 61e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im720120 61e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im720120 61e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SL1000

The “E” in the manual numbers are the language codes.

Contact information of Yokogawa offices worldwide is provided on the following sheet.

7th Edition: October 2015 (YMI)

Article 1 (Scope Covered by these Terms and Conditions)

Article 2 (Grant of License)

Article 3 (Restriction of Specific Use)

Article 7 (Limit of Export)

Article 9 (Injunction for Use)

Article 12 (Governing Law)

Structure of the Manual 2

Chapter 1 What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Chapter 2 Installation Procedure

Chapter 3 Connecting to the SL1000

Chapter 4 Specifying Measurement Settings

Chapter 5 Recording Measured Data 1

Chapter 9 Other Functions

Chapter 10 File Operation

1.1 Overview of This Software 1

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Signal and Data Flow

Measurement and Recording

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Signal input Signal input Signal input Signal input

If Connecting to the SL1000 for the First Time

Install the USB driver (section 2.3)

Connect via the Ethernet network (option)

Set the connection method to Ethernet on (section 3.4)

Connect to the SL1000 via the Ethernet network

(IM 720120-01E, a separate manual)

Configure the system Set the measuring group

Set the measuring mode (section 4.1)

If Reconnecting to the SL1000 1

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Set the record conditions 5

Set the display conditions

Start recording Start recording 7

Setup in Wizard Format

Measurement Settings screen

Recording Settings screen Acquisition menu

Display Settings screen Acquisition menu

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Group ID = 0 Group ID = 1 Group ID = F

Measuring group 1 Measuring group 4

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Measurement points at the specified sample rate

Box Average Mode

Input signal (500 kS/s) • • • • 36 • • • •

Sample Rate and Sample Interval 1

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Data that is not actually acquired

AC (Only When Measuring the AC Voltage)

TC (Only When Measuring the Temperature)

ACCL (Only When Measuring Acceleration)

Probe Attenuation and Current-to-Voltage Conversion Ratio 1

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

Normal display Inverted display

What the Acquisition Software Can Do

2 Vpeak Approx. 1.4 V